JP2019195559A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving a degree of attention of a player to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: shooting means for shooting a game ball to a game area formed on a game board; start ball entry means for the entry of a game ball falling down in the game area, which executes an internal lottery in the entry of a game ball; and game state transition means for transitioning a game state on the basis of a result of the internal lottery. The game state includes a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode which is more advantageous for a player than the low frequency support mode. The result of the internal lottery includes a low frequency support mode result for transitioning the game state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, and a high frequency support mode result for transitioning the game state to the high frequency support mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the game board, and a start ball entering means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery upon entering the game ball Is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery when the game ball enters the starting pitching means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Accordingly, the player plays a game in the hope of shifting to the high frequency support mode.

JP 2011-235036 A

  However, since the transition destination of the first game state and the second game state is associated with the result of the internal lottery, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve a player's attention to the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention has a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters A gaming machine comprising a starting ball entry means for performing and a game state transition means for transitioning a gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery, wherein the gaming state is based on the first gaming state and the first gaming state. And a second gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the result of the internal lottery is the first lottery result for shifting the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state; And a second lottery result for shifting the gaming state to the gaming state.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, the gaming machine can improve a player's attention to the game.

The front view of the pachinko machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. Front view of game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of the right-hand variable pitching mechanism The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing electrical configuration of pachinko machine The figure which shows the contents of each counter used for internal lottery The figure which shows the electric power winning / failing table which memorize | stored the value of the random number elected winning occurrence of electric power opening The figure which shows the success / failure table which memorize | stored the value of the random number which is won by winning The figure which shows the distribution table which memorize | stored the value of the random number which concerns on the sort type of hit The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interruption processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of normal processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing The figure which shows the flowchart of game times control processing The figure which shows the flowchart of data setting processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of a game state transfer process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening and closing processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize mouth opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode The figure which shows the flowchart of variable entry execution processing The figure which shows the flowchart of change end processing Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. The figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the production | presentation for opening / closing execution modes The figure which shows the relationship between game result and game state etc. The figure which shows the effect for the game turn when the game ball wins to the lower operation opening with the winning to the through gate as a trigger in the high frequency support mode Enlarged view showing the periphery of the right-hand variable pitching mechanism The figure which shows the production | presentation for opening-and-closing execution modes when a game ball wins a right entrance (V winning) The figure which shows the effect for game times when staying in special mode The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the production | presentation for opening / closing execution modes The figure which shows the relationship between game result and game state etc. The figure which shows the production | presentation for opening-and-closing execution modes when a game ball wins a right entrance (V winning) The figure which shows the effect for game times when staying in special mode The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of change end processing The figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the production | presentation for opening / closing execution modes The figure which shows the relationship between game result and game state etc. The figure which shows the production | presentation for opening-and-closing execution modes when a game ball wins a right entrance (V winning) The figure which shows the effect for game times when staying in special mode The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of a game frequency counter setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the production | presentation for opening / closing execution modes The figure which shows the relationship between game result and game state etc. The figure which shows the production | presentation for opening-and-closing execution modes when a game ball wins a right entrance (V winning) The figure which shows the effect for the game turn when the game ball wins to the lower operation opening with the winning to the through gate as a trigger in the high frequency support mode

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that is a kind of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward (front side). 12.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is disposed in front of the inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions being the support side, and both the left and right sides. The front door frame 13 is supported by the inner frame so that it can be rotated forward with one of the support sides as a support side, and the rear side with one of the left and right sides as the support side. And a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

  Note that the gaming machine main body 12 includes a locking device (not shown) provided at the rotating tip. This locking device has a function of setting the gaming machine body 12 to a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and a function of setting the front door frame 13 to a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 14 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made colorless and transparent with glass, but may be made colorless and transparent with synthetic resin or the like.
The front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of the light emitting means constituted by various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion. 23, a speaker unit 24 that outputs a sound effect according to the game situation, and an upper bulging unit 25 and a lower bulging unit 26 provided below the window unit 21. Yes.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and are both provided to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 includes an upper plate 25a provided on the inner side so as to open upward, and a push button 25b that receives an input of information when operated by a player. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 5) provided in the back pack unit, and arranges them in a line to the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 5) side. Has a function to guide. The push button 25b functions as an operation means for executing an expected effect that causes the player to expect that the game state is shifted to a specific control state advantageous to the player when operated by the player.
The lower bulging portion 26 has a lower plate 26a provided on the inner side so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing game balls that have become surplus in the upper tray 25a.

  Further, the front door frame 13 includes a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. The launch handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to launch a game ball from a game ball launch mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. To do. The launch handle 27 changes the launch intensity of the game ball that is launched toward the game area, that is, the launch momentum, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to the surface thereof, and is mounted on the inner frame. The game area described above is formed in the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. This gaming area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide ball 34 for a game ball to the game area. The played game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area.

  The guide rail 34 is formed so that the exit portion thereof is disposed on one side of the gaming area and faces the upper center of the gaming area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is increased from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the amount of rotation of the launch handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side. In the present embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

  The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning port 35, an upper operating port (first starting pitching portion) 36, a lower operating port (second starting pitching portion) 37, a variable winning device 38 provided in each opening, And an outlet 39. Further, the game board 31 is provided on the right side of the variable winning device 38 provided on the right side, the two through gates 41 provided on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, and the upper right side. A main display device 42, a variable display unit 43 provided at the center, and the like. Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 and various members (acts) such as a windmill in the game area so as to disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls as appropriate. ing.

  Each of the general winning port 35, the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the various winning ports of the variable winning device 38 includes detection sensors 50a to 50d (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entering of game balls. The detection sensors 50 a to 50 d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 includes a detection sensor 50a, the upper operation opening 36 includes a detection sensor 50b, the lower operation opening 37 includes a detection sensor 50c, and the variable winning apparatus 38 includes a detection sensor 50d. It has. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 50a to 50d. The detection sensors 50a to 50d may be any sensors as long as they can individually detect a winning game ball. For example, an electromagnetic induction proximity sensor may be employed.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 35. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper working port 36 and when a ball enters the lower working port 37. The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 award balls when a winning ball enters the variable winning device 38. Note that the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

  The out port 39 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area of the game board 31. The game balls that have not entered the various winning openings etc. are discharged from the game area through this out opening 39. In addition, the out port 39 includes a detection sensor 50e (see FIG. 5) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 50e is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the payout of the winning ball when the ball enters the out port 39, unlike when the ball enters the various winning ports.

  Each through gate 41 includes a detection sensor 50f (see FIG. 5) that detects the entry of a game ball, and executes an internal lottery when a game ball enters. The detection sensor 50f is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the payout of the prize balls when the entrance to each through gate 41 occurs, unlike the case where the entrance to various winning entrances occurs.

  Here, the term “entering ball” means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 39, the game ball entering the various game ports is also expressed as a win. In addition, entering the through gate 41 means that the game area continues to flow down without being discharged from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. The entry to the through gate 41 is also expressed as a win, as is the case of entering the various winning openings.

  The upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are unitized as an operating port device and installed in the game board 31. Each of the operation ports 36 and 37 opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the upper operation port 36 is disposed upward and the lower operation port 37 is disposed downward. Are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The lower working port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric combination 37a is connected to an electric combination driving unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state) by being driven by the electric agent drive unit 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

  Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set in a closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface portion of the upper working port 36 is narrower than that of one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper working port 36 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot win the lower working port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can win the lower working port 37 when the opened game is set. it can.

  In addition, the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 (a state in which a game ball can enter unlike the closed state) instead of the closed state and the open state described above, It is good also as a structure which switches the state in which a game ball is easy to win a prize to the action port 37. Further, the lower working port 37 may be configured not to perform such switching by setting of the electric accessory 37a but to be performed by displacement of the lower working port 37. 37 does not need to include the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an open / close door 38b for opening and closing the large winning opening 38a, and the open / close door 38b. And a variable winning drive unit 38c.
Note that the player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, it is possible to guide the game ball to the variable winning device 38, the right variable pitching mechanism 40, the lower working port 37, etc., avoiding the variable display unit 43 (right-handed route) ).

In addition, the player strikes left with the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 27 being medium, and the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is changed from the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to By shifting to the upper left, the game ball can be guided to the upper working port 36, the lower working port 37, etc. (left-handed route).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the game area is easy to generate a game ball to enter the upper operation port 36, and the first route (left) is difficult to generate a game ball to enter the lower operation port 37. Hitting route) and a second route (right hitting route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the lower operating port 37 and does not easily generate a game ball to enter the upper operating port 36. .

Here, the game board 31 includes a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38. The cover 381 is provided with a transparent panel 381a that is transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 38 can be seen from the front side, and is provided around the transparent panel 381a and is opaque. A panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window portion 21.

  The special winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the special winning opening 38a includes the detection sensor 50d that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The open / close door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the special winning opening 38a. The open / close door 38b moves forward toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, thereby closing the opening of the special winning opening 38a and moving backward toward the inside of the game board 31. By burying in 31, there is an open state in which the opening of the special winning opening 38 a is opened.
The variable winning drive unit 38c drives the open / close door 38b to set the open / close door 38b to either the open state or the closed state.

Specifically, the open / close door 38b is normally set in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won. Then, when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is made, the opening / closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can be won.
The opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening / closing door 38b is set in an open state and a game ball can be inserted into the special winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode, the period from when the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again is referred to as one round game.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable pitching mechanism.
As shown in FIG. 3, the right variable pitching mechanism 40 is configured to guide a game ball flowing down the game area into the right variable pitching mechanism 40, and the right variable pitching mechanism 40 by the guiding unit 401. A guide path 402 for guiding the game ball guided to the entrance of the game, a switching unit 403 for switching the destination of the game ball guided in the guide path 402, and a right entrance 404 provided at the guide destination of the guide path 402 And a left entrance 405.

  The guiding portion 401 includes a blade member 401a provided on the game board 31 so as to close an inlet formed on the right side of the right variable pitching mechanism 40, and a blade member centering on an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. A pin 401b that rotatably supports 401a and a blade member driving unit 401c that drives the blade member 401a are provided.

The blade member 401a rotates counterclockwise around the pin 401b, thereby closing the inlet of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 (indicated by a one-dot chain line in the figure), and rotating clockwise around the pin 401b. By moving, it has an open state (solid line in the figure) in which the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 is opened. The blade member 401a is inclined so as to descend toward the entrance side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 in the open state.
The blade member drive unit 401c drives the blade member 401a to set the blade member 401a to either the closed state or the open state.

Accordingly, when the blade member 401a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 401c, the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 through the blade member 401a using the inclination of the blade member 401a. (Solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the blade member 401a is set in the closed state by the blade member driving unit 401c, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 (the chain line in the figure).

  The guide passage 402 is formed in such a width that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the passage at the same time. The guide passage 402 is bifurcated in the middle, and has an upstream guide passage 402a located on the upstream side of this branch, and two downstream guide passages 402b and 402c located on the downstream side. .

  The upstream guide passage 402 a guides the game ball guided to the entrance of the right variable entrance mechanism 40 by the guide portion 401 from the entrance of the right variable entrance mechanism 40 to the branch position of the guide passage 402. The upstream guide passage 402 a is inclined so as to descend from the entrance of the right side variable ball entry mechanism 40 toward the branch position of the guide passage 402. Therefore, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 402 along the upstream guide passage 402a using the inclination of the upstream guide passage 402a.

The downstream guide passage 402b is provided at a position close to the blade member 401a. Further, the downstream guide passage 402 b is formed along the vertical direction so that the game ball falls from the branch position of the guide passage 402. The downstream guide passage 402 b guides the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 through the upstream guide passage 402 a to the right entrance 404.
The downstream guide passage 402c is provided at a position far from the blade member 401a. The downstream guide passage 402c is formed along the vertical direction so that the game ball falls from the branch position of the guide passage 402. The downstream guide passage 402c guides the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 through the upstream guide passage 402a to the left entrance 405.

  The switching unit 403 supports the plate 403a so as to be rotatable about a plate 403a provided in the game board 31 so as to close the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402b and an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. The pin 403b and the plate drive part 403c which drives the plate 403a are provided.

The plate 403a rotates clockwise around the pin 403b, thereby closing the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402b (two-dot chain line in the figure) and counterclockwise around the pin 403b. As a result, the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402c is closed and the inlet of the downstream guide passage 402b is opened (solid line in the figure). In the closed state, the plate 403a is inclined so as to descend toward the downstream side guide passage 402c.
The plate driving unit 403c drives the plate 403a to set the plate 403a to either the closed state or the open state.

Therefore, when the plate driving unit 403c sets the plate 403a to the open state, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 is guided to the entrance of the downstream guide passage 402b and then the right entrance. The ball enters 404 (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the plate 403a is set in the closed state by the plate driving unit 403c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 402 travels downstream through the plate 403a using the inclination of the plate 403a. After being guided to the entrance of the side guide passage 402c, the ball enters the left entrance 405 (two-dot chain line in the figure).

  The right entrance 404 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The right entrance 404 is provided with a detection sensor 50g that detects entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the payout of the winning ball when entering the right entrance 404, unlike the case where entering the various winning entrances.

  The left entrance 405 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The game ball that has entered the left entrance 405 merges with the game ball that has passed through the out port 39 described above, and is discharged from the game area. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the payout of the winning balls when the entering into the left entrance 405 occurs, unlike the case where the entering into various winning entrances occurs.

When the entrance to the right entrance 404 occurs, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. The letter “V” indicating that the mode is to be changed is displayed.
Further, when the entrance to the left entrance 405 occurs, the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, so the downstream guide passage 402c that guides the game ball to the left entrance 405 includes: A character “x” indicating that the mode is not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode is displayed.

Here, the blade member 401a and the plate 403a are normally set in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won. Then, in the internal lottery, when the shift to the variable pitch execution mode is won and the shift to the variable pitch execution mode is made, the blade member 401a and the plate 403a are set in an open state in which a game ball can be won.
The variable entry execution mode is a state in which the blade member 401a is set in an open state, a game ball can be entered in the right side variable entry mechanism 40, and the plate 403a is set in an open state or a closed state. This is a mode in which a game ball can enter either the entrance 404 or the left entrance 405. In the variable pitching execution mode, after setting the plate 403a to the open state, the time until it is set to the closed state again (open period) is set to the closed state again after the blade member 401a is set to the open state. It is shorter than the time until opening (open period). Specifically, the opening period of the plate 403a is about 1/10 of the opening period of the blade member 401a.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main display device 42 includes a main display unit 45 and an accessory display unit 46, and a segment display or dot display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. A plurality of display devices such as these are arranged.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than that of one game ball. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from dropping in front of the main display device 42.

  The main display unit 45 includes a first result display unit 45 a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36, and the internal performed based on the winning to the lower working port 37. And a second result display unit 45b for displaying the lottery result (see FIG. 5). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening / closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the display of the variation of the picture triggered by the winning at the upper working port 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 36 as a result of stopping the variation display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes display of variation of a picture triggered by a winning at the lower working port 37, and an internal lottery performed based on winning at the lower working port 37 as a result of stopping the variation display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the variable pitching execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the variable pitching execution mode. Further, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode when entering the right entrance 404 in the variable entry execution mode.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 function as starting entrance means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when entering the game ball. To do.

  The accessory display unit 46 displays the variation of the picture triggered by the winning of each through gate 41, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 as a result of stopping the variation display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric power open state. In this electric combination open state, the electric combination 37a provided in the lower working port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are configured by segment displays. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed. Alternatively, a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be employed.

  The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 51 that performs variable display (variable display or switching display) of a symbol that is a kind of pattern. The variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 52 disposed so as to surround the symbol display device 51. The upper portion of the center frame 52 is provided so as to bulge out toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from dropping in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G decreases due to the fall of the game ball. It has a configuration.

The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 51 starts symbol variation display based on winning in the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. That is, when the symbol display device 51 executes the variable display in the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and the variable display in the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

  The center frame 52 includes a first holding lamp unit 53 provided in a lower left region of the symbol display device 51, a second holding lamp unit 54 provided in a lower right region of the symbol display device 51, and a symbol display. And a third holding lamp portion 55 provided in the upper region of the device 51.

The first hold lamp unit 53 is a part that displays the number of game balls held in the upper operation port 36 and lights up according to the number of holds. The first hold lamp unit 53 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 45a and the symbol display device 51.
The second holding lamp unit 54 is a part that displays the number of game balls held in the lower operating port 37 and lights up according to the number of held balls. The second hold lamp unit 54 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 45 b and the symbol display device 51.

The third holding lamp section 55 is a part for displaying the number of game balls held in each through gate 41 and lights up according to the number of holds. The third hold lamp unit 55 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 46.
Each of the holding lamp units 53 to 55 may have another configuration such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 51.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device. Specifically, FIG. 4 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the variation display of the symbol is executed using a winning at the upper working port 36 as a trigger, and FIG. 4 (B). These are figures which show the display screen G of the symbol display apparatus 51 in the case of performing the change display of a picture triggered by winning in the lower operation port 37.
As shown in FIG. 4, the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is divided into three columns of display areas. Each display area includes a left symbol column Z1, a middle symbol column Z2, and a right symbol in order from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In FIG. 4, the center line of each display area is indicated by a one-dot chain line.

When the change display of the pattern is executed using the winning at the upper working port 36 as a trigger, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of numbers “1” to “8” as shown in FIG. Eight types of symbols are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and the next to “8” is “1”.
When the change display of the pattern is executed with the winning in the lower working port 37 as a trigger, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is made up of alphabetic characters “A” to “C” as shown in FIG. The three types of symbols are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and “C” is arranged next to “A”.
Therefore, the player confirms whether or not the change display of the picture is executed by using the winning of the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 as a trigger by looking at the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. can do.

The symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on winning in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for game times is executed on the display screen G. The effect for the game turn is changed from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line L. Exit with state.
In other words, the game times refers to the period from when the variable display is started on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 based on the winnings to the respective operation ports 36 and 37 until a predetermined stop result is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 51 is not limited to this and is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the scroll direction of each symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the symbols of each symbol row may be a mode in which a picture and a number or an alphabet are combined instead of a number or a letter only, or a picture only.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out the game ball, and a power source that executes discharge control for causing the game ball launching mechanism 81 to fire the game ball. And a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the backpack unit.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. This substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when opened, or may have a trace structure that leaves a trace when opened. Specifically, as the trace means, a substrate box is configured by combining a plurality of case bodies, and a connection portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or peeling is performed. At this time, a configuration in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off due to the adhesive layer remaining on the adhesion target can be applied so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure etc. which apply | coat an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between these case bodies can be employ | adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element obtained by compounding a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are formed as one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but may be configured as separate chips. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a success / failure table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, a power combination success / failure table storage area 63c, and a reach table storage area 63d.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed, and a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, an electric utility reservation area 64c, and various flag storage areas 64d.

  The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. The output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory driving unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower working port 37, a variable prize driving unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. The blade member drive unit 401c that opens and closes 401a, the plate drive unit 403c that opens and closes the plate 403a, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 are connected.

  The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the state where the electric combination is released, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the electric combination driving unit 37b to open and close the electric combination 37a. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open / close the special winning opening 38a. In the variable pitching execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the blade member drive unit 401c to open and close the blade member 401a, and also executes the drive control of the plate drive unit 403c to open and close the plate 403a. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning in each of the operation ports 36 and 37.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power source / launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts output from the power source / launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 50a to 50g are attached to various winning ports, an out port 39, a right ball port 404, and each through gate 41 of the general winning port 35, the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the variable winning device 38. One-to-one correspondence is provided. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 50a to 50g, the MPU 62 performs a winning determination (a winning determination) for each of the various winning openings, the out opening 39, the right entering opening 404, and each through gate 41. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37.

  Based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60, the payout control device 70 executes payout control that causes the payout device 71 to pay out a prize ball or a rental ball (a game ball lent to a player during a game). To do.

  The power / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, the power source / launch control device 80 generates necessary operating power for the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation Supply power. The power supply / launch control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power interruption supplies power for storage retention to the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 even when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

  In addition, the power source / launch control device 80 executes launch control for causing the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch a game ball. Here, the game ball launching mechanism 81 includes a launch rail that extends toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeder that feeds the game balls stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, And a solenoid that is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34. The power supply / firing control device 80 supplies a driving signal (firing permission signal) to the solenoid to fire a game ball when predetermined firing conditions are satisfied.

<Electrical configuration for executing internal lottery in MPU 62 of main controller 60>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 6, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the random number counter C1 for the winning lottery, and uses the type counter C2 for the winning type lottery, and reaches the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display. A random number counter C3 is used. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS for determining the display duration in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory release counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower working port 37 is in the electric utility open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 5).

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Are stored in a reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 5) provided as an acquisition information storage means.

  The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display area reservation area Ra, a second result display area reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

  The first result display area reservation area Ra provided as the first acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 sets each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 as holding information in time series in each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 displays the hold information in the order of the first area Ra1, the second area Ra2, the third area Ra3, and the fourth area Ra4 when the winning to the upper working port 36 is continuously generated a plurality of times. Store in time series.

As described above, the first result display section holding area Ra includes four storage areas, and therefore, up to four winnings of game balls to the upper operation port 36 are held. The first result display area reservation area Ra includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
Note that the number of reserves related to the upper operation port 36 is not limited to four, but may be arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be.

  The second result display area reservation area Rb provided as the second acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 sets each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 as holding information in time series in each area Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 displays the hold information in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4 when the winning to the lower operating port 37 occurs continuously a plurality of times. Store in time series.

As described above, the second result display section holding area Rb includes four storage areas, and therefore, up to four winnings of game balls to the lower operation port 37 are held. The second result display area reservation area Rb includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
Note that the number of reserves related to the lower operation port 37 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be.

  The execution area AE stores the hold information stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb when starting the variable display of the result display sections 45a and 45b. It is an area for moving.

<Detailed description of each counter>
Details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer at the timing when a game ball wins each through gate 41.
Then, the MPU 62 determines whether or not to set the electric combination 37a of the lower working port 37 to the electric open state based on the value of the electric combination release counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer (electric combination) Open lottery).

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with different frequencies at which a game ball can be awarded to the lower working port 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to an open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state. It has a relatively high high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a power combination success / failure table storing a random number value that is won for the occurrence of a power role release.
Among the values of the electric component release counter C4, the random number value that is won for the occurrence of the electric combination release is, as shown in FIG. 7, the electric combination determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 provided as the electric combination determination information group storage means. (Refer to FIG. 5) is stored as a power combination success / failure table (electric role success / failure information group).

Further, the power combination acceptance / rejection table includes a low-frequency support mode power-use / rejection table (low-frequency power combination success / failure information group) shown in FIG. 7A and a high-frequency support mode use state shown in FIG. And a power combination success / failure table (a high-frequency power role success / failure information group).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of an electric combination release by comparing these electric combination acceptance / rejection tables and the value of the electric combination release counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer.

These electric role winning / rejecting tables have a plurality of lottery results (electric role winning / failing results) of the occurrence of opening of the electric roles, “Electrical character opening winning” and “Outgoing result”.
Here, “Electrical Role Opening Winning” is a result of determining whether or not the electrical role has been achieved with the electrical role 37a of the lower working port 37 being in the open state.

Specifically, under the gaming state in which the power combination success / failure table for the low frequency support mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the release of the main role, as shown in FIG. The number of random numbers is one. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the electrification opening lottery wins the occurrence of the electrification opening with a probability of 1/251.
In addition, in the low frequency support mode, except for the random number value that is “electrical player winning selection”, the winning result is “winning result” without winning the electric utility release.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, a random number that becomes an “outage result” under the gaming state in which the electronic role winning / failing table for the high frequency support mode is referred to when the electronic role is released. The value of is one.
In addition, in the high frequency support mode, except for the random number value that is the “outage result”, the occurrence of the electric role release is won and becomes the “electric role release result”. In other words, in the high-frequency support mode, the electrification opening lottery wins the occurrence of the electrification opening with a probability of about 250/251.
In addition, the value and the number of random numbers stored in each electric role winning / failing table are arbitrary, and the high frequency support mode has a higher probability of being “electric role open winning” than the low frequency support mode. Good.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game balls are more likely to win the lower operation port 37 as compared to the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that the game ball will win the upper operation port 36 than the lower operation port 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball wins the lower working port 37 is higher than the upper working port 36.
When a winning to the lower operating port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.

  The configurations of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the number of times that the electric utility item 37a is set to the open state when compared with the low frequency support mode when the occurrence of the electric role release is won. In addition, for example, the high frequency support mode is configured such that, when winning for the occurrence of an electric utility release, the one open time for setting the electric accessory 37a to an open state is longer than that for the low frequency support mode. May be. In addition, for example, in the high frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state during each opening in the one electric power open state is made shorter than in the low frequency support mode. It may be configured. Further, for example, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (1 in the accessory display unit 46) is set as a waiting time from the completion of the electric character opening lottery to the next electric character releasing lottery. It may be configured to shorten the time duration of the variable display) compared to the low frequency support mode. In addition, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high frequency support mode may be configured so that a short reserved time is easily selected compared to the low frequency support mode. You may comprise so that it may shorten compared with low frequency support mode. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times that the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the open time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode is used to set the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the low frequency support mode. You may comprise so that it may be relatively high compared with.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode functions as a first gaming state in which the probability of entering the upper operation port 36 is higher than the lower operation port 37. In addition, the high frequency support mode is a second game state in which the probability of entering the lower operation port 37 is higher than the upper operation port 36, so that the game state is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. Function.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 599. . Each time the winning random number counter C1 loops once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as an initial value. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 599, like the hit random number counter C1.

The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Stored in Specifically, the value of the winning random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 36, and the game ball wins the lower working port 37. It is stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery (win / no lottery) based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a success / failure table that stores random number values that are won for winning.
Among the values of the winning random number counter C1, the value of the random number that is won for the winning occurrence is, as shown in FIG. It is stored as (Attack Information Group).

The success / failure table includes a first success / failure table (first success / failure information group) shown in FIG. 8A and a second success / failure table (second success / failure information group) shown in FIG. 8B.
The MPU 62 performs a lottery of a hit occurrence (a big hit occurrence or a small hit occurrence) by comparing the success / failure table with the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first success / failure table is a big hit for the value of the winning random number counter C1 shifted from the holding area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the winning random number counter C1 based on the winning to the upper working port 36. It is a table referred when performing generation | occurrence | production lottery. In the first success / failure table, as shown in FIG. 8A, there are two random number values “7” and “77” for “big win”.
In addition, the number of random numbers used for “small winning” is “100 to 199”. In other words, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the probability of “winning a small win” is 1/6.
Further, except for the values of the random numbers that are “winning jackpot” and “small jackpot winning”, it is a “normally missed result” without winning the jackpot occurrence.

The second success / failure table is smaller than the value of the winning random number counter C1 shifted from the holding area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the winning random number counter C1 based on winning in the lower operating port 37. It is a table referred when performing a lottery of winning. In the second success / failure table, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), the number of random numbers for “small winning” is 480, “0 to 479”. In other words, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower working port 37, the probability of “winning a small win” is 4/5.
Here, the values of the random numbers for “Big Winning Winning” and “Small Winning Winning” stored in the first winning / losing table are included in the random number values for “Short Winning Winning” stored in the second winning / failing table. Yes.

Other than the random number value that is “winning a small hit”, a “normally missed result” is obtained without winning a small hit.
In addition, the value and number of random numbers stored in each success / failure table are arbitrary. In addition, the random number value that is “small winning prize” stored in the second winning / losing table does not include the random number value that becomes “big winning prize” and “small winning prize” stored in the first winning / losing table. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the first winning / failing table and that are “big hit winning” and “small winning winning”.

Here, the “big hit winning” is a result of success / failure for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.
Further, “Small Winning Win” is a result of success / failure of shifting to the variable entry execution mode. Then, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening / closing execution mode when the entrance to the right entrance 404 occurs in this variable entry execution mode.
In the following description, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode due to the entry to the right entrance 404 is also expressed as a jackpot occurrence.

Here, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the probability of “small winning” is 1/6. As described above, the opening period of the plate 403a is the blade member. Since it is about 1/10 of the opening period of 401a, the probability of shifting to the variable pitching execution mode and winning the jackpot occurrence is about 1/60 when the winning to the upper working port 36 is triggered.
In addition, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower working port 37, the probability of “small winning” is 4/5. As described above, the opening period of the plate 403a is the blade member 401a. Therefore, the probability of shifting to the variable pitching execution mode upon winning the lower operating port 37 and winning the jackpot occurrence is about 1 / 12.5.

Next, the hit type counter C2 will be described. The hit type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 29. .
The win type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Stored in Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sort lottery) of the hit type when a hit occurs based on the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a distribution table in which random values related to the hit type are assigned.
As shown in FIG. 9, the random number value related to the hit type is assigned to the distribution table (distribution table) in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. Minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 9A and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 9B. ing.
The MPU 62 compares the allocation table with the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, thereby executing the win type lottery.

The first distribution table corresponds to the value of the winning type counter C2 shifted from the first result display area holding area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the winning type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operating port 36. It is a table referred when performing a win type lottery.
As shown in FIG. 9A, the first distribution table includes “low frequency support mode result (low frequency support mode compatible result)” and “high frequency support mode result (high frequency support mode compatible). A plurality of distribution results “)” are set as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the hit type counter C2, “0 to 14” is distributed to the “low frequency support mode result”, and “15 to 29” is “high”. “Frequency support mode results”.
Therefore, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the probability of becoming the “low frequency support mode result” is 50%, and the probability of becoming the “high frequency support mode result” is also 50%. is there.

The second allocation table corresponds to the value of the winning type counter C2 shifted from the second result display holding area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the winning type counter C2 based on winning in the lower operating port 37. It is a table referred when performing a win type lottery.
As shown in FIG. 9B, the second distribution table includes “low frequency support mode result (distribution result corresponding to low frequency support mode)” and “high frequency support mode result (high frequency support mode compatible distribution). A plurality of distribution results “)” are set as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, “0-9” among the values “0-29” of the hit type counter C2 are distributed to the “low frequency support mode result”, and “10-29” is “high”. “Frequency support mode results”.
Therefore, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower working port 37, the probability of becoming the “low frequency support mode result” is about 33%, and the probability of becoming the “high frequency support mode result” is about 67. %.

The “low frequency support mode result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is finished except when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This low-frequency support mode continues until a jackpot occurs.
The “high frequency support mode result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of game times reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value 238, and then returning to 0. .
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. Stored in More specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when a “usually unsuccessful result” is obtained without a “big win” or “small win” in the winning / losing lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 62 is stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b when the “usual winning result” is obtained without the “big hit winning” or the “small winning winning” in the winning / losing lottery. By comparing with the value of the reach random number counter C3, a lottery for determining whether or not a reach display is generated is executed, and a reach display is generated when a reach display is generated in the lottery. The reach table is a table storing random values related to the occurrence of reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 63d (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63.

  Here, in the case where the winning / losing lottery is “big hit winning” and the distribution lottery is assigned to “high frequency support mode result”, the symbol display device 51 has the same odd number as the stop result. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In addition, in the case where the winning lottery is “big hit winning” and the distribution lottery is assigned to “low frequency support mode result”, the symbol display device 51 has the same even number as the stop result. Are stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Furthermore, in the case where the winning lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36 is “small winning”, the symbol display device 51 does not use a combination of symbols having the same number as a stop result. Then, a special symbol combination having different numbers that are not selected when a “normally unsuccessful result” is obtained in the success / failure lottery is stopped and displayed on the active line L. If the winning lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 37 is “small winning”, the symbol display device 51 uses the combination of symbols having the same alphabet as the effective line L as a stop result. Stop display above.

  The reach display is performed when a combination of symbols having the same number or the same alphabetic character is finally stopped and displayed (when a “big win” is selected in the winning / losing lottery, or based on winning in the lower operating port 37) In the winning lottery), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is performed when a special combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed (when the winning combination lottery based on the winning of the upper working port 36 is “small winning”). It does not occur regardless of the value of the random number counter C3.

The reach display mode is such that some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are on the effective line L. By stopping the display, the same symbol combination is displayed to suggest the stop result, and the remaining symbol row (for example, symbol row Z2) is variably displayed in that state.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 generates a reach display, and after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 51, before displaying a predetermined stop result, the “big hit win” or “small win” The player can be expected to have won.

  Note that the reach display mode is not limited to this. A part of the symbol sequence is stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol sequence is variably displayed. Alternatively, a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after each symbol row is reduced or displayed.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 51. The expectation effect is a game in which a lottery win or a lottery win is made in the winning lottery after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 51 and before a predetermined stop result is displayed. This is a production that makes people expect. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, the reach display described above and the notice display.

The notice is displayed in the case of a “big win” or “small win” in the winning lottery, but not in the “lottery winning” or “small winner” in the winning lottery. Is an expected production that makes it easier to produce production. This notice display may make it easy to select an effect having a low appearance rate instead of making it easy to generate an effect, or may combine these effects.
The lottery for determining whether or not to generate a reach display is executed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery for determining whether or not to generate a notice display is executed by the sound emission control device 90. .

The notice display mode is that some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 are variably displayed (for example, In a situation where a plurality of symbol strings (for example, symbol strings Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed or reach display is generated after the symbol string Z1) is stopped on the active line L, a predetermined character is displayed. Are displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display is generated in both cases where reach display is generated and reach display is not generated, but is set so that it is more likely to occur when reach display is generated than when reach display is not generated. Has been.
Note that the notice display is not limited to this, and may be displayed with the background changed, for example, or may be displayed with the form of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 changed.

Finally, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once every execution of a normal process described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display duration in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display duration in the symbol display device 51 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<Various processes executed by main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes a timer interrupt process and a normal process for advancing the game, and a main process that starts when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process, the normal process, and the main process will be described in order.
The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process that is activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) in addition to the timer interrupt process, the normal process, and the main process, but the description of this process is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S101 to S105 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes a reading process for the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 50a to 50d corresponding to the various winning openings detect the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 issues a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls that are a specific unit number. Is sent to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out a prize ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

  In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. To do. When the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the MPU 62 resets the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it.

  In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 by adding 1 respectively, and the update. The later value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. When the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of each of the counters C1 to C4, the MPU 62 resets the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a through winning process. In this through winning process, if the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of a game ball, the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103. Is stored in the electronic role holding area 64c. In addition, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third hold lamp unit 55 and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 lights the third hold lamp unit 55 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls won in the through gate 41 is four, and the third reserved lamp section 55 lights up in a number corresponding to the reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operation port. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the working opening will be described in detail.

<Winning process for the working opening>
FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a winning process for an operation port.
In the winning process for the operation port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

  In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has won (start prize) at the upper operation port 36 by determining whether or not the detection sensor 50b corresponding to the upper operation port 36 has detected a winning of the game ball. Determine whether. If the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won the upper working port 36, in step S202, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display unit reservation area Ra, and holds the reservation. The number is set as a first start reserved memory number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the first result display area reserved area Ra. Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S205.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper operation port 36, the detection sensor 50c corresponding to the lower operation port 37 receives the game ball winning in step S203. It is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize (start prize) at the lower operating port 37 by determining whether or not it has been detected.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that no game ball has been won in the lower working port 37, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the working port. If the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won the lower operation port 37, in step S204, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb. The reserved number is set as a second start reserved memory number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the second result display area reserved area Rb. Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 determines that the start pending storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) in step S205. It is determined whether or not there is.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start-pending storage number N is not less than the upper limit, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, in step S206, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the value of the start pending storage number N and updates it.

  In step S207, the MPU 62 sets a set of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the result display unit reserved area. The information is stored as the hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number N of start hold storage updated in step S206.

  For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending storage number RaN in step S202, each of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first result display section hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when “3” is set to the first start pending storage number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 is a storage area corresponding to “4” of the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S206. The hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

  For example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending storage number RbN in step S204, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interruption process. Are stored as hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the second result display section hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. To do. For example, when “3” is set in the second start pending storage number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 is a storage area corresponding to “4” in the second start pending storage number RbN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

In step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the first hold lamp unit 53 or the second hold lamp unit 54, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operation port.
The sound emission control device 90 turns on the first hold lamp unit 53 or the second hold lamp unit 54 based on a command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls won in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is four, and the first reserved lamp unit 53 or the second reserved lamp unit 54 has the reserved number. The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which starts when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process that is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and performs steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute.

  In step S301, the MPU 62 executes an external output process for transmitting the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize ball command is set. If it is determined that a prize ball command is set, the MPU 62 sends the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Send. In addition, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not an effect command such as a command corresponding to an effect for game play, an effect for a variable pitch execution mode, or a command corresponding to an effect for an opening / closing execution mode is set. If it is determined that an effect command has been set, the effect command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the variation type counter CS by adding 1, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . When the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the MPU 62 returns the value of the variation type counter CS to 0 and clears it.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes a game times control process for advancing game times. In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes the winning / losing lottery and the distribution lottery, determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. Determine information related to
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes a transition process to each game state such as an opening / closing execution mode, a variable pitch execution mode, a low frequency support mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game turn control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes a demonstration display execution determination process. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined demo start start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game time after the game time has ended. If it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 62.

  Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S305. For example, when the start waiting period is 3 sec and the interval of repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the process of step S305 and reaches the start waiting period when it reaches 750 times Is determined to have passed. In addition, the structure which measures a start waiting period is arbitrary, For example, you may measure a start waiting period using a real-time clock. In addition, when the MPU 62 starts a new game number while counting the number of executions of the process in step S305, the MPU 62 resets the count value.

  In step S <b> 306, the MPU 62 executes a power combination support process for performing drive control of the power combination 37 a provided in the lower operation port 37. In this electric combination support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric combination release lottery based on the value of the electric combination release counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64. In addition, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory release lottery.

  In step S307, the MPU 62 executes a game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply / fire control device 80 to launch a game ball based on the fact that the player has rotated the launch handle 27. Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 80 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball by exciting a solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a predetermined period (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). . Note that the solenoid is excited so as to launch a game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the launch handle 27. Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 to fire the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

  In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed. This power failure flag is cleared at the next execution of the main process.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by assigning 1 to the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power failure flag by assigning 0 to the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag has been set, the MPU 62 executes the power interruption process from step S312 without executing the process from step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (a checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is not set, in step S309, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached, that is, the current normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the next normal processing timing has not been reached, that is, if the remaining time has occurred, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S310, and step S311 Then, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it is determined in step S309 that the next normal processing timing has been reached.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the next normal processing timing has been reached, that is, when the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 performs the next time by executing step S301 again. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process as the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to be operable, and then waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after turning on the power. ) Will wait.

  In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec which is a permission prohibition period has elapsed. If the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has not elapsed in step S402, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S403.

  Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S402. For example, when the interval at which the process of step S402 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number of executions of the process of step S402 is counted and reaches 10,000. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S <b> 404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power / fire control device 80 is turned on.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, in step S405, the MPU 62 determines whether a power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. To do.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag has not been set, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S409 and subsequent steps.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, the MPU 62 calculates a RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value stored in step S313 (processing at power interruption) of the normal process. The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

If the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S407, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S409 and subsequent steps.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, the MPU 62 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

  The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method for confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is assigned to a predetermined area of the RAM 64 during power interruption processing. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining whether or not this keyword is normally written by the main process.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines the RAM determination value in step S407. If it is determined that is not normal, the processing after step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and executes initialization of the RAM 64 in step S410.

  Therefore, for example, an administrator of a game hall can initialize data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch when the game hall starts business. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the processing of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S411, and in step S412, a timer interrupt is issued. The generation of the process is permitted, and the process proceeds to the normal process described above.
The control board on the sub side receives the initial command transmitted in step S411, thereby recognizing that communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed and executing its own initialization. To do.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the game times control process.
In the game turn control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed. If the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 ends the game number control process without executing the processes in and after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 refers to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 to determine whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. The same applies to the following processes. The MPU 62 sets an opening / closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, and clears the opening / closing execution mode flag when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, in step S502, whether or not the main display unit 45 is variably displayed, that is, the game is in progress. It is determined whether or not.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not in a variable display, the MPU 62 executes a game turn start process in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the main display unit 45 is in a variable display in step S502, the MPU 62 executes the game turn progression processing in steps S506 to S509.

First, the process for starting game times in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb, and holds these numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of each is less than or equal to “0”. When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not equal to or less than “0”, in step S504, the MPU 62 holds the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area. A data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for use in game times is executed. Thereafter, in step S505, the MPU 62 starts a variation display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 to execute variation start processing for digesting the game times, and ends the game times control processing.
Hereinafter, the data setting process in step S504 and the change start process in step S505 will be described in detail.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reserved memory number RbN of the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the winning operation for the operation port is “0” or less. To do. If the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606, and then proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than “0”, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

Thus, the data setting process includes a data setting process for the first result display unit that sets the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit for use in the game times, and a second result display unit. And a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for use in game times.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 performs the second result display unit without executing the data setting process for the first result display unit. Execute data setting process. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is the holding information stored in the second result display unit holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37, Regardless of whether or not there is holding information stored in the first result display area holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball, the holding information stored in the second result display area holding area Rb is preferentially played. Set for 1 digestion.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the first result display section hold area Ra.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display section hold area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion hold area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and sets the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra3. Shift to area Ra3.

  In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. This second result display part flag is a flag for specifying which main display part 45 of the first result display part 45a and the second result display part 45b starts the variable display when the game times are digested. It is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display portion flag, the variable display is displayed on the first result display portion 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 when the game times are digested. Indicates that you want to start.

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. The command at the time of shift is a voice light emission control device indicating that the hold information has been shifted with respect to the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 36. The information for making 90 recognize is included.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp unit 53 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of lighting of the first holding lamp unit 53 with a decrease in the number of reserved game balls won in the upper operation port 36.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start hold memory number RbN in the second result display section hold area Rb and updates it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display section hold area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion hold area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and sets the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb2. Shift to area Rb3.

  In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 has set the second result display section flag, on the basis of the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37, the variable display is displayed on the second result display section 45b when the game times are digested. Indicates that you want to start.

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift time command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift is based on the fact that the hold information is shifted with respect to the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display section based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37. The information for making 90 recognize is included.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp unit 54 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of lighting of the second holding lamp unit 54 with the decrease of the number of reserved game balls won in the lower operation port 37.

FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the variation start process.
In the change start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S717 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball in the upper operation port 36. In step S702, the first success / failure table (see FIG. 8A) is read from the success / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37. In step S703, the second acceptance / rejection table (see FIG. 8B) is read from the acceptance / rejection table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

  After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes a determination processing in step S704. In this success / failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success / failure table read in step S702 or step S703, thereby determining the result of the success / failure lottery (result of success / failure). Determine. In addition, as described above, the success / failure result is one of “big hit win”, “small win winner”, and “normal loss result”, and even if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is used. Even if there is, it is the same.

  In step S <b> 705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S <b> 704 is a winning occurrence (“big winning winning” or “small winning winning”). If the MPU 62 determines that the success / failure result is a hit occurrence in step S705, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S706 onward. Execute the process.

First, processing (processing after step S706) when it is determined in step S705 that the success / failure result has occurred in the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. In step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 9A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37 is used. In step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 9B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 62 executes a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S707 or step S708, thereby determining the result of the distribution lottery ( Distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is “big hit winning”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S710 that the winning / failing result is “big hit winning”, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the big hit result in step S711. In this jackpot result stop result setting process, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. The determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 compares the result of distribution determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, so that the final result is displayed on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45. The information related to the pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined. The jackpot result stop result table defines the pattern form to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 for each sorting result.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S710 that the result is not “big hit winning” (when the result is determined to be “small winning”), in step S712, the small hit result Execute stop result setting process. In the stop result setting process for the small hit result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 finally displays a stop display on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the small hit result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The information related to the pattern to be determined is determined.

After executing the processing of step S711 or step S712, the MPU 62 sets a flag corresponding to the distribution result determined in step S709 in the RAM 64 in step S713. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is the “low frequency support mode result”, the MPU 62 sets the low frequency support mode result flag to indicate that it is the “high frequency support mode result”. If specified, the high frequency support mode result flag is set. Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S715.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes the determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, a process (process after step S714) when it is determined in step S705 that the success / failure result is not a hit by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S714, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for a normal off result. In the stop result setting process for the normal off result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal off result stored in advance in the ROM 63, thereby determining information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the normal loss result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the big hit result and the stop result table for the small hit result.

After executing any one of steps S711, S712, and S714, the MPU 62 executes a display duration (display duration) setting process in step S715.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

  Further, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 51. Specifically, when the success / failure result determined in step S <b> 704 is “big winning”, the MPU 62 determines that the successful result determined in step S <b> 704 is “small winning” based on winning in the lower operating port 37. In this case, or when the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is “normal losing result” and the reach generation lottery is won, it is determined that the reach display is generated. As described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Reach generation lottery is executed.

  When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display is generated, the MPU 62 refers to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, thereby obtaining the variation type counter obtained from the variation type counter buffer. The display duration corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in a display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

  When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, thereby obtaining the fluctuation obtained from the fluctuation type counter buffer. The display duration corresponding to the value of the type counter CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in a display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set such that the display duration is shortened as the number of reserved items increases. Therefore, the display continuation time when digesting the hold information related to the upper operation port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of reservations related to the upper operation port 36 increases. And the display continuation time at the time of digesting the hold information concerning the lower operation port 37 is set so as to become shorter as the number of the hold operations related to the lower operation port 37 increases. The reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display duration in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

  Note that the display non-occurrence display duration table may be set in a reverse relationship to the relationship described above, such as increasing the display duration as the number of held items increases, depending on the number of held items and the support mode. It is good also as a structure which does not change. In addition, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the success / failure results and the distribution results.

In step S716, the MPU 62 sets a change command and a type command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the change command and the type command set in step S716 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the change command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

The change command includes information related to the display duration time. The change command does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are mutually Is different.
Therefore, even if information indicating whether or not reach display occurs is not included in the change command, reach display is performed by the sound emission control device 90 which is the sub-side control device based on the information related to the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the change command indirectly includes information on whether or not reach display occurs. Note that the change command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

The type command includes information related to the result of the determination. In other words, the type command includes, as information related to the success / failure result, each information related to “big hit winning”, “small winning winning”, and “normally lost result”. The type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command includes information related to “low frequency support mode result” and “high frequency support mode result” as information related to the distribution result.
In the following description, the winning / failing result and the distribution result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the game result.

In step S717, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the change start process.
Specifically, if the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first game ball is awarded based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 when the game times are digested. Since the result display unit 45a indicates that the variable display is started, the first result display unit 45a starts the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 determines the second based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37 when the game times are digested. Since the result display unit 45b indicates that the variable display is started, the second result display unit 45b starts the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game times control processing, the game times progress processing in steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is in a variable display. Execute the process.

  In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S715 of the variation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 has become “0” or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes a variable display process in step S507. In this variation display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 45 during the variation display. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes a variation end process in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 stores the information stored in the RAM 64 in any one of the steps S711, S712, and S714 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display (main The information related to the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45 is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display unit 45 so that a picture corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during variable display. The variation end process will be described in detail later.

Here, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is different for each type of game result. Therefore, a game hall manager or the like can check the game result by viewing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, for example, the manager of the game hall can easily confirm whether or not an illegal act is attempted to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the same behavior as in the case of winning a lottery with a big hit. Can be done automatically.
Further, the display area of the main display unit 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the winning lottery is won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 instead of the main display unit 45. The degree of attention to the display screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a change end command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the change end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game time based on the change end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the voice light emission control device 90 may be configured to end the game times independently without requiring the reception of the change end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S820 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes processing from step S811 onward.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening / closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the variable pitching execution mode.
Note that the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the variable pitch execution mode by referring to the variable pitch execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to the following processes. The MPU 62 sets a variable entry execution mode flag at the time of transition to the variable entry execution mode, and clears the variable entry execution mode flag at the end of the variable entry execution mode.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that it is not in the variable pitch execution mode, it executes the processing from step S803 onward.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that it is in the variable pitch execution mode, it executes the processing from step S816.

First, a process when the MPU 62 determines that it is not in the variable pitch execution mode in step S802 (process after step S803) will be described.
In step S803, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display unit 45 has ended. If the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the change display on the main display unit 45 has not ended, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the change display on the main display unit 45 has been completed, a win / fail result is generated in step S804 ("big win win" or "small win win"). It is determined whether or not.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the result is not a hit, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the success / failure result has been a win, the MPU 62 determines in step S805 whether the success / failure result is “Small Winning”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the winning / failing result is “small winning”, in step S806, the MPU 62 sets the variable entry execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the success / failure result is not “small-winning winning” (when the winning / failing result is determined to be “big-winning winning”), the MPU 62 opens and closes the RAM 64 in step S807. After the execution mode flag is set, the processing after step S808 is executed.

  In step S808, the MPU 62 sets “15” to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

Here, the opening / closing execution mode ends on condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
Note that the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the one big winning opening 38a for one round game. One round game is continued until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. (2) The total number of winning game balls to the big prize opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit.

  In step S809, the MPU 62 sets “1000” as the waiting time (waiting period) for the opening in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 sec. Note that the waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for the opening in the timer counter T in step S809 regardless of the type of the distribution result. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of distribution result.
In addition, the waiting time for opening is not limited to this, For example, it is good also as a structure which makes it differ slightly according to the kind of distribution result to such an extent that it is recognized that it is the same by a player. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the distribution result of the “low frequency support mode result” and the distribution result of the “high frequency support mode result”. It is also possible to employ a configuration that greatly varies depending on the type of distribution result.

In step S810, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process. This opening command includes information on the distribution result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the sound emission control device 90.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the opening / closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62 and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, processing (processing after step S811) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 is in the opening / closing execution mode will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 62 executes a special winning opening / closing process.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special prize opening / closing process.
In the special winning opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S916 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special winning opening 38a is being opened.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the special winning opening 38a is not being opened, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S902 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the special winning opening 38a is being opened, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S906.

First, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined in step S901 that the MPU 62 does not open the special prize opening 38a will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening / closing process.

In contrast, when the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the value of the round counter RC is not “0” or less, in step S903, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less. Determine.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening / closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes a big prize opening opening process in step S904.
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening process in step S904 will be described in detail.

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process.
In the big prize opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1003 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, “8” is set to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and “15000” is set to the timer counter T in step S1002. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

  In step S1003, the MPU 62 executes an opening execution process for the special winning opening 38a. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b in an open state by executing drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening process.

Note that the value set in the winning counter PC in step S1001 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 38a.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1002 defines the upper limit duration until the door 38b is set in the open state and then set in the closed state again.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a period of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets “8” to the winning counter PC, thereby setting the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 38a.
Therefore, the upper limit duration is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls to be awarded to the grand prize opening 38a and the launch period of the game balls. It is easy to win 38a.

Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process, the processes after step S905 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets the release command in step S905 after executing the special winning opening release process in step S904. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S905 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening / closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 38b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is being opened in the step S901 (the process after the step S906) will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has passed in step S1002 of the big prize opening opening process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S907.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S910.

  In step S907, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a winning to the big winning opening 38a has occurred. The determination as to whether or not a winning at the special winning opening 38a has occurred is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the special winning opening 38a.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that no winning is made for the big winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening / closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that a winning at the big winning opening 38a has occurred, the MPU 62 updates the value of the winning counter PC by subtracting 1 in step S908.

In step S909, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is “0” or less, or in step S906, the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less. In step S910, a closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b in the closed state by executing drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c.

In step S911, the MPU 62 sets a close command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S911 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 38b is set to the closed state based on the close command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC and updates it.
In step S913, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than “0”, the MPU 62 sets “500” as the value of the timer counter T in step S914. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening / closing process.

  Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S914 is the waiting for opening until the opening / closing door 38b is set to the opened state again after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the opened state. Time is prescribed. In the present embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. The opening waiting time is the same regardless of the progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes in and after step S915.
In step S915, the MPU 62 sets “2000” as the ending standby time (standby period) in the timer counter T. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for ending is the same regardless of the type of the distribution result, like the waiting time for opening.
Note that the waiting time for ending is not limited to this. For example, the waiting time for ending may be slightly different depending on the type of distribution result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Also, for example, the waiting time for ending is greatly different between the case of the distribution result of the “low frequency support mode result” and the case of the distribution result of the “high frequency support mode result”. It is also possible to employ a configuration that greatly varies depending on the type of distribution result.

In step S916, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S916 to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening / closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening / closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Returning to the description of the gaming state transition processing, the processing after step S812 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than “0” in step S812 after executing the big prize opening / closing process in step S811.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the value of the round counter RC is not “0” or less, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less, whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less in step S813. Determine.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S814.
In step S815, the MPU 62 executes a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1108 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes in and after step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when the distribution result is determined to be the “low frequency support mode result”), The process after step S1105 is executed.
First, in step S1101, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” (process after step S1102) will be described.

In step S1102, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes with different support modes that are shifted to after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a normal mode in which a support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends according to a distribution result of “low frequency support mode result” and “high frequency support mode result”, and “low frequency support mode result”. Regardless of the distribution result of “mode result” and “high frequency support mode result”, the game mode includes a special mode in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which of the normal mode and the special mode is the game mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, the game mode is set to the normal mode.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 game times that are the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC are consumed. The MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag when 100 game times have been consumed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” in step S1101 (process after step S1105) will be described.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when the distribution result is determined to be the “low frequency support mode result”), in step S1105, It is determined whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

  When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the special mode), the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102 described above. In other words, when the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution result of the “low frequency support mode result” and the “high frequency support mode result”. Set to support mode.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 in Step S1105 (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), it is stored in the RAM 64 in Step S1106. Clear the high frequency support flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

In step S1107, the MPU 62 sets a special mode flag in the RAM 64. When the special mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.
In step S1108, the MPU 62 sets “30” to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode continues until 30 game times that are the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC are consumed. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when 30 game times are consumed. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
The MPU 62 clears the hold information stored in the second result display portion holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball in the lower operation port 37 after executing the process of step S1108.

  As described above, when the winning lottery occurs and the allocation result becomes the “high frequency support mode result” in the allocation lottery, the gaming state is the open / close execution mode regardless of the current gaming state. After completion, shift to high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode does not occur in the lottery, and when 100 game times are consumed, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

  In addition, if the winning lottery occurs and the allocation result becomes “low frequency support mode result” in the allocation lottery, the gaming state is the opening / closing execution mode if the gaming mode is the special mode. After the end, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. If the game mode is the normal mode, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high frequency support mode does not occur in the lottery, and when 100 game times are consumed, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low-frequency support mode is continued until at least a win occurs in the winning lottery. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are consumed, and then shifts to the normal mode.

  In addition, in the case where no win occurs in the winning / losing lottery, that is, in the case where the winning / failing result is a “normal failure result”, the gaming state does not shift.

  Here, the value of the game number counter RTC is included in the aforementioned change command. Information relating to the game mode (information relating to whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the above-described opening command.

Returning to the description of the gaming state transition processing, the processing after step S816 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is the variable pitch execution mode, and if it is determined that the variable pitch execution mode is in effect, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S816.

In step S816, the MPU 62 executes variable pitching execution processing.
Hereinafter, the variable pitch execution process will be described in detail.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of variable pitching execution processing.
In the variable entry execution process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1215 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the blade member 401a is being opened.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the blade member 401a is not being opened, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S1202 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the blade member 401a is being opened, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1207 onward.

First, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the blade member 401a is not being opened in step S1201 (process after step S1202) will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 executes the blade member opening execution process. In this blade member opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to the open state by executing drive control of the blade member driving unit 401c.

In step S1203, a blade member release command is set. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the blade member release command set in step S1204 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the blade member 401a has been set to the open state based on the blade member release command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

  In step S1204, the MPU 62 determines whether the high frequency support flag or the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1204 that the high frequency support flag or special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets “1000” in the timer counter T in step S1205. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 2 sec. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the variable pitching execution process.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the high frequency support flag or the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1204 (when it is determined that the low frequency support mode is the normal mode), the step In S1206, “50” is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.1 sec. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the variable pitching execution process.

Next, processing (processing after step S1207) when it is determined in step S1201 that the blade member 401a is being opened by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1207, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S1208 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S1214 and subsequent steps.

First, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is not “0” or less in step S1207 (process after step S1208) will be described.
In step S1208, the MPU 62 refers to the plate opening / closing execution flag stored in the RAM 64 to determine whether the opening / closing of the plate 403a has been executed. The plate opening / closing execution completion flag is a flag for specifying that the opening / closing of the plate 403a is executed after the blade member 401a is set to the open state and before the blade member 401a is set to the closed state. The MPU 62 sets a plate opening / closing execution flag when the plate 403a is opened / closed, and clears the plate opening / closing execution flag when the blade member 401a is set to the closed state.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the opening / closing of the plate 403a has been executed (if the plate opening / closing execution flag is set in the RAM 64), the MPU 62 ends the variable pitching execution process.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the opening / closing of the plate 403a has not been executed (if the plate opening / closing execution flag is not set in the RAM 64), the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T in step S1209. It is determined whether or not the value is “500” or less. In other words, in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the MPU 62 determines whether 1 sec has elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state. Note that in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, the MPU 62 sets “50” to the timer counter T in step S1206. Will do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the timer counter T is not “500” or less (in the high-frequency support mode or the special mode, it is assumed that 1 sec has not elapsed after the blade member 401a is set to the open state. If it is determined, the variable pitching execution process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the timer counter T is “500” or less (in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the blade member 401a is set to the open state and then 1 sec. In step S1210, a plate opening process is executed. In this plate opening process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to an open state by executing drive control of the plate driving unit 403c.

  In step S1211, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter T is “400” or less. In other words, in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the MPU 62 determines whether 0.2 sec has elapsed after setting the plate 403a to the open state. Note that, in the low frequency support mode of the normal mode, the MPU 62 sets “50” to the timer counter T in step S1206, so it is determined in step S1211 that the value of the timer counter T is “400” or less. Will do.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1211 that the value of the timer counter T is not less than “400” (in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, 0.2 sec has not elapsed since the plate 403a was set to the open state). Is determined), the variable pitching execution process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1211 that the value of the timer counter T is “400” or less (in the high frequency support mode or the special mode, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the open state, If it is determined that 2 seconds have passed), a plate closing process is executed in step S1212. In this plate closing process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a in a closed state by executing drive control of the plate driving unit 403c.

  In step S1213, the MPU 62 sets the plate opening / closing execution flag by substituting 1 into the area indicating the plate opening / closing execution flag provided in the various flag storage areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the variable pitching execution process.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less in step S1207 (process after step S1214) will be described.
In step S1214, the MPU 62 executes a blade member closing execution process. In the blade member closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a in the closed state by executing drive control of the blade member driving unit 401c.

  In step S1215, the MPU 62 assigns 0 to the area indicating the plate opening / closing execution flag and the variable pitching execution mode flag provided in the various flag storage areas 64d of the RAM 64, so that the plate opening / closing execution flag and variable input are set. Clear the ball execution mode flag. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the variable pitching execution process.

  As described above, in the variable pitching execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to an open state, allows a game ball to enter the right variable pitching mechanism 40, and sets the plate 403a to an open state or a closed state. The game ball can be entered into either the right entrance 404 or the left entrance 405.

  In the variable pitching execution mode in the high-frequency support mode or the special mode, the blade member 401a is set to the open state after the plate 403a is set to the open state and until it is set to the closed state again (open period). After that, the time until the closed state is set again (open period) is shorter. Specifically, the opening period of the plate 403a (0.2 sec in this embodiment) is about 1/10 of the opening period of the blade member 401a (2 sec in this embodiment). In other words, a game ball that has entered the right variable entrance mechanism 40 enters the right entrance 404 with a probability of approximately 1/10.

In the present embodiment, during the opening period of the blade member 401a, the plate 403a performs one opening / closing operation, but may perform a plurality of opening / closing operations.
In this embodiment, the opening period of the plate 403a is 0.2 sec and the opening period of the blade member 401a is 2 sec. However, other opening periods may be adopted.
In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the open state when it determines that 1 sec has elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state, but sets the plate 403a to the open state. Other timings may be adopted as the timing to perform.

  On the other hand, in the variable pitching execution mode in the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, the time (open period) until the blade member 401a is set to the closed state again after being set to the open state is 0.2 sec. The plate 403a opens and closes immediately after the blade member 401a is set to the open state. In other words, the game ball is prevented from entering the right variable entrance mechanism 40.

Returning to the description of the gaming state transition processing, the processing after step S817 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 executes the variable entry execution process in step S816, and then determines whether the detection sensor 50g corresponding to the right entry slot 404 has detected the winning of the game ball in step S817. It is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize (V prize) at the ball opening 404.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S817 that a game ball has won the right entrance slot 404, the MPU 62 executes a V winning success process in step S818. In this V winning success process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the blade member drive unit 401c to set the blade member 401a to the closed state, and then executes the plate opening / closing execution flag and the variable pitch execution stored in the RAM 64. Clear the mode flag. In the V winning success process, the MPU 62 sets a V winning success command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the V winning success command set in step S818 to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S807 described above.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that a game ball has won the right entrance 404 based on the V winning success command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

  In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S817 that no game ball has won the right entrance 404, it determines in step S819 whether or not the blade member 401a has been set to the closed state. To do.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S819 that the blade member 401a is not set to the closed state, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S819 that the blade member 401a is set to the closed state, the MPU 62 executes a V winning failure process in step S820. In this V winning failure process, the MPU 62 sets a V winning failure command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the V winning failure command set in step S820 to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the game ball has not won the right entrance 404 based on the V winning failure command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode as it is when it is “big hit win” in the winning lottery, while it is variable when it is “small win winning” in the winning lottery. If the entrance to the right entrance 404 occurs in this variable entrance execution mode, the mode changes to the opening / closing execution mode.
It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable entry execution mode, when only the entrance to the left entrance 405 occurs, or the entrance into the right entrance 404 and the left entrance 405 occurs. If not, the mode is not shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

Here, as described above, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that the game ball will win the upper operating port 36 than the lower operating port 37. In addition, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the probability of winning the “small win” is 1/6.
However, in the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, as described above, when the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36 is “small winning”, the game ball is placed on the right side. It is impossible to enter the variable entrance mechanism 40.
In the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, when the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36 is “small winning”, the game ball is placed on the right variable pitching mechanism 40. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot occurrence is about 1/60.

<Change end processing>
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the change end process.
In the change end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1309 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 stores information (main display unit) stored in the RAM 64 in any one of steps S711, S712, and S714 of the change start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts changing display. 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display unit 45 so that a picture corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during the variable display (variation end execution process).

In step S1302, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1306 onward.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, in step S1303, the game number counter set in step S1104 of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Update by subtracting 1 from the RTC value. Here, the change command set in step S716 described above includes the value of the game number counter RTC.
In step S1304, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game number counter RTC is “0” or less.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1304 that the game number counter RTC is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S1306 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1304 that the game number counter RTC is “0” or less, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1305. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

  As described above, when the “big hit win” is set in the winning / losing lottery and the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the gaming state is the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current gaming state. After completion, shift to high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until 100 game times that are the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC are consumed.

After executing the process of step S1305, if it is determined in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, or if it is determined in step S1304 that the game number counter RTC is not less than “0”, the MPU 62 In step S1306, it is determined whether or not the game mode is a special mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the game mode is not the special mode (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 62 ends the variation end process without executing the processes in and after step S1307. .
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the game mode is the special mode in step S1306, the MPU 62 sets the game number counter RTC set in step S1108 of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S1307. Update by subtracting 1 from the value. Here, the change command set in step S716 described above includes the value of the game number counter RTC.

In step S1308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game number counter RTC is “0” or less.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the game number counter RTC is not equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 ends the variation end process without executing the processes in and after step S1309.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the game number counter RTC is “0” or less, the MPU 62 clears the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1309. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the variation end process.

  As described above, when the special win flag is set in the RAM 64 in the winning / no-win lottery, the gaming state ends the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current gaming state. Later, it shifts to the special mode. The special mode continues until thirty game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, are consumed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
In the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 performs the low frequency operation based on the internal lottery result (the low frequency support mode result or the high frequency support mode result) in the normal mode and the high frequency support mode in the low frequency support mode. The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, since the player is expected to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but may have this.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 enters an opening / closing execution mode that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. When the gaming state is shifted from the normal control state and the gaming state is shifted from the opening / closing execution mode to the normal control state, the gaming state is shifted to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low-frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode. Can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the right variable pitching mechanism 40 launches toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. It functions as a variable pitching mechanism that allows the gaming balls that have been entered to be pitched. The main controller 60 shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. Here, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation port 37, the probability (about 1 / 12.5) of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode via the variable entry execution mode is Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36, the probability of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode through the variable entry execution mode is higher (about 1/60). Yes. According to this, since the player expects to shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. Transition game mode. Specifically, the main controller 60 shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when shifting the gaming state to the low frequency support mode, and shifts to the normal mode when shifting the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. The game mode is shifted to. According to this, since the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when shifting the gaming state to the low frequency support mode, and shifts the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. Although the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 changes the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then a predetermined number of game times (30 times in the present embodiment) are consumed. Transition. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game has been digested, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In this embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is digested 30 times after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times is consumed. For example, the number of game times is divided into a plurality of times such as 30 times and 50 times. You may do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is digested 30 times after shifting the game mode to the special mode. As a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, when the number of “small winning” exceeds a predetermined number, the game mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode. You may make it transfer.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is digested 30 times after shifting the game mode to the special mode. When a game ball is fired toward the right-handed route, the game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode. In other words, the main control device 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when a game ball is launched toward the right-handed route while staying in the special mode. According to this, in the high-frequency support mode, the player launches a game ball toward the right-handed route, and in the special-mode low-frequency support mode, the player launches a game ball toward the left-handed route. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player, and can make the player play the game comfortably.

In this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the gaming state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is a high-frequency support mode. It functions as a second lottery result for shifting the gaming state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode even when the low-frequency support mode result is obtained, and increase the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
The low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode that shifts the gaming state to the low-frequency support mode when the low-frequency support mode results, and a high-frequency support mode when the low-frequency support mode results. Special mode for transition. According to this, since the player is expected to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that in the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, since the player is expected to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the probability that the special mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode is 100% higher than that in the normal mode, but may not be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the main control device 60 switches the game from the normal control state to the opening / closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is changed and the game state is changed from the opening / closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is changed to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when the game state shifts from the opening / closing execution mode to the normal control state. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing. For example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the game times.

<Electrical Configuration of Sound Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 23, the sound light emission control device 90 includes a sound light emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound light emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element obtained by compounding a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply when holding the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed, and a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp units 23, 53 to 55, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100.
The MPU 92 performs drive control of the various lamp units 23 and 53 to 55 and the speaker unit 24 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits a command obtained by analyzing these commands to the display control apparatus 100. The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element obtained by compounding a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104. The MPU 102, the VDP 105, the character ROM 106, and the video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

  The MPU 102 analyzes a command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and performs a predetermined calculation process based on this command to control the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the program ROM 103 is executed. The work RAM 104 is a volatile memory that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a storage means.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver installed in the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the entity should be said to be a microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads out image data from the character ROM 106 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 51. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various designs, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display contents of the symbol display device 51 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

<Timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes a timer interrupt process that advances the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically executes steps S2001 to S2005 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

  In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer according to the order stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes an effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines an effect for game times, an effect for the variable entry execution mode, an effect for the opening / closing execution mode, and the like.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 23 and 53 to 55 and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24.

  In step S2004, the MPU 92 executes a demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demonstration display execution processing, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined demonstration start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed without starting a new gaming time after the gaming time has ended. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the various lamp units 23 and 53 to 55 and executes the sound control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2005, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect determination process in step S2002 and the demonstration display execution process in step S2004 to the display control apparatus 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100, and displays the various commands. If it is determined that the transmission timing has been reached, the command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.
Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 25 shows a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process to execute an effect for game times, an effect for a variable pitch execution mode, an effect for an opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the change command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 are received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2109.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has been received, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not the result is “big hit winning” based on the contents of the type command. Determine.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the winning / failing result is “big hit winning”, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S2103 onward.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the result is not “big win”, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2104.

First, a process (process after step S2103) when it is determined in step S2102 that the winning / failing result is “big win” in the MPU 92 will be described.
In step S2103, the MPU 92 executes a jackpot symbol determination process. In this jackpot symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”, the same odd number as the stop result to be finally stopped on the active line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and it is determined that the distribution result is the “low frequency support mode result”, the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the active line L The information concerning the combination of symbols having the number of is determined. Note that odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Next, processing (processing after step S2104) when it is determined in step S2102 that the winning / failing result is not “winning winning” in the MPU 92 will be described.
In step S2104, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the result is “small winning” based on the content of the type command.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the winning / failing result is “small winning”, in step S2105, the MPU 92 executes a symbol determining process for small winning. In the symbol determination process for small hits, the MPU 92 is finally stopped on the active line L when “winning lottery” is made in the winning lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36. Information related to a special symbol combination is determined as a stop result to be displayed. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers that are not selected in the case of a “normally missed result” in the lottery determination (for example, “3 ・ 4 ・ 1”) is determined. In the case of “winning / winning” in the winning / losing lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operating port 37, the MPU 92 has the same alphabetical character as a stop result to finally stop display on the active line L. Information related to the combination of symbols is determined.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the result is not “small winning” (when it is determined that the result is “normal failure result”), in step S2106, the MPU 92 makes a normal failure. The symbol determination process is executed. In the normal determination symbol determination process, based on the content of the variation command, the MPU 92 executes the variation display of the pattern with the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as a trigger. (Which main display part 45 of the first result display part 45a and the second result display part 45b is to execute the variable display) and reach display is generated based on the contents of the change command It is determined whether or not to do.

The MPU 92 determines that the change display of the pattern is executed with a winning at the upper working port 36 as a trigger, and when it is determined that the reach display is generated, the reach is finally reached as a stop result on the active line L. Information related to the combination of symbols to be displayed is determined. The combination of symbols for reach display is determined randomly by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 determines information related to a combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols described above as a stop result that is finally stopped on the active line L. To do. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of a combination of symbols having the same number, a special symbol combination, and a symbol combination of reach display by lottery or the like.

In addition, the MPU 92 determines to execute the variable display of the picture triggered by the winning at the lower operation port 37, and when it is determined that the reach display is generated, the MPU 92 finally displays the stop on the active line L. The information concerning the combination of symbols for reach display is determined.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 determines information related to a combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols described above as a stop result that is finally stopped on the active line L. To do. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines a combination of symbols different from both a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic character and a combination of symbols for reach display.

  After executing the process of step S2103, step S2105, or step S2106, the MPU 92 executes an effect pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the production duration (production duration) and the content of the production as the production pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a notice display.

  Here, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, when the MPU 92 is “small winning” as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, Before the variable display of the symbol display device 51 ends, a character is displayed on the display screen G, and a prior notification effect is given to notify the player to make a right strike at the character's dialogue. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes a prior notification effect 5 seconds before the variable display on the symbol display device 51 ends. According to this, the player causes the game ball to reach the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 before the blade member 401a is set to the open state by the MPU 62 by starting the right handing after confirming the prior notification effect. Can do. In other words, the game ball can reach the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 within 5 seconds after being launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, when the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is “small winning” In other words, the player can enter the game ball into the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 by starting the right handing after confirming the prior notification effect.
Here, as described above, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win the upper operation port 36 than in the lower operation port 37. In the high frequency support mode, the game ball is in the upper operation port 36. As a result, the probability of winning the lower working port 37 becomes higher. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower working port 37, the probability (about 1 / 12.5) of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode via the variable entry execution mode is: Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36, the probability of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode via the variable entry execution mode is higher (about 1/60). .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode functions as a first time-saving state that makes it easier to enter the right variable entry mechanism 40. The low frequency support mode of the special mode functions as a second short time state in which it is difficult to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 as compared to the high frequency support mode. According to this, since the game state can be diversified from the normal control state to the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

  On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, the MPU 92 receives a “small winning” as a result of an internal lottery performed based on winning in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. Does not execute the prior notification effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the low-frequency support mode of the normal mode, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37 is “small winning”. In this case, since the player cannot confirm the prior notification effect, the player cannot enter the game ball into the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. In other words, the low-frequency support mode in the normal mode cannot enter the right variable entrance mechanism 40.

  In the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball wins the lower operation port 37 is higher than the upper operation port 36. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball moves toward the right-handed route. By functioning as a first time-short state that is advantageous to the player. In the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the probability that the game ball wins the upper operation port 36 is higher than the lower operation port 37. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode of the special mode, the game ball is directed toward the right-handed route. By firing, it functions as a second short time state that is disadvantageous for the player compared to the high frequency support mode. In other words, the special mode low-frequency support mode is advantageous to the player by firing the game ball toward the left-handed route. According to this, since the game state can be diversified from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

  In the present embodiment, the first short-time state increases the probability of winning the lower working port 37 rather than the upper working port 36, and the second short-time state has the higher working port 36 than the lower working port 37. By increasing the probability of winning, a situation that is advantageous and disadvantageous for the player was created. On the other hand, the first short time state shortens the display duration of the variable display based on the winning to the lower working port 37, and the second short time state changes based on the winning to the lower working port 37. By increasing the display duration of the display, situations that are advantageous and disadvantageous for the player may be created.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selected effect pattern.

  In step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in step S2103, step S2105, or step S2106 and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S2107. Then, the MPU 92 stores the stop result command and the pattern command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. These stop result commands and pattern commands are transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  Based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for executing the game-turn effect on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes an effect for game times based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and finally displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the active line L. Stop display.

After executing the process of step S2108 or when determining that the change command and the type command are not received in step S2101, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2109.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variable pitching execution mode command (blade member release command, V winning success command, or V winning failure command) transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that it has not received a command for the variable entry execution mode, it executes the processing from step S2112 onward.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that it has received a command for the variable pitch execution mode, it executes a process for determining the effect for the variable pitch execution mode in step S2110. In this variable entry execution mode effect determination process, if the MPU 92 determines that the blade member release command has been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 refers to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. An effect pattern corresponding to the opening of the blade member 401a is selected. If the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the V winning success command has been received, the MPU 92 selects the effect pattern corresponding to the V winning success by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. If it is determined in step S2109 that the V winning failure command has been received, an effect pattern corresponding to the V winning failure is selected by referring to an effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

  In step S2111, the MPU 92 sets a command for a variable pitch execution mode including an effect for the variable pitch execution mode selected in step S2110. Then, the MPU 92 stores the command for the variable entry execution mode in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The command for the variable entry execution mode is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  The MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 produces an effect for the variable pitch execution mode (opening the blade member 401a, success of the V prize, or failure of the V prize based on the command for the variable pitch execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92. The data table for executing the effect corresponding to the symbol) on the symbol display device 51 is read from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the variable pitch execution mode and notifies the player that the blade member 401a has been opened, that the V winning has been successful, or that the V winning has failed.

After executing the process of step S2111 or when it is determined in step S2109 that the command for the variable pitch execution mode has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2112.
In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether or not an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2116 onward.
In contrast, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, the MPU 92 determines the type of the distribution result in step S2113 based on the contents of the opening command.

  In step S2114, the MPU 92 executes an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the distribution result determined in step S2113.

FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode in order to determine an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204 as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is a “high frequency support mode result”.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S2202. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when the distribution result is determined to be the “low frequency support mode result”), In step S2203, based on the contents of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode when the “hit and win” is selected in the winning / losing lottery is the special mode.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 92 executes the processing after step S2202 described above, and selects the effect A as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is not the special mode (when the game mode is determined to be the normal mode), the MPU 92 produces an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S2204. Select B. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
It should be noted that the durations of effects A and B correspond to the times for opening and closing the special prize opening 38a 15 times in the opening and closing execution mode.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selection result of the effect A and the effect B.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the process after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an opening / closing execution mode command including information related to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected in step S2114. The opening / closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  Based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S2115 or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2116.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a game result and a game state or the like. Specifically, FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding “normally missed results” and the game states and the like, in which the game results are arranged in the column direction, and the game states and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 27, the pachinko machine 10 has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has distribution results of “high frequency support mode result” and “low frequency support mode result” as game results excluding “normal outage result”.

  Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normally lost result” and the game state will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the gaming result and the gaming state as follows, but the combination of the gaming result and the gaming state, the contents of the gaming result, and The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, the contents such as the game state differ depending on the game results of the “high frequency support mode result” and the “low frequency support mode result”.
Specifically, in the “high frequency support mode result”, the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times. In addition, in the “high frequency support mode result” based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect A. . In the “high frequency support mode result” based on the winning of the lower working port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetical characters, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect A. Further, in the “high frequency support mode result”, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. The next game mode is the normal mode.

  Further, in the “low frequency support mode result”, the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times. In addition, in the “low frequency support mode result” based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect B . In the “low frequency support mode result” based on the winning to the lower working port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetical characters, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect B. Further, in the “low frequency support mode result”, the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. The next game mode is the “special mode”.

In contrast, in the game mode of “special mode”, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of “high frequency support mode result” and “low frequency support mode result”.
Specifically, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the game result based on the winning to the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same numbers, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect A. Further, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. The next game mode is the normal mode.

  Therefore, the player grasps that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” or the “low frequency support mode result” by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<Regarding the game ball entering the right variable ball entry mechanism and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an effect for a game turn when a game ball wins at the lower operation port triggered by winning at the through gate in the high frequency support mode.
Note that the high frequency support mode is either “big win” or “small win” in the winning lottery, and is assigned to the “high frequency support mode result” in the distribution lottery, or during the special mode stay. When the lottery is “big win” and the distribution lottery is assigned to “low frequency support mode result”, the process proceeds. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the result of the success / failure is “small winning”.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4B) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. To shift to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the symbol fluctuation display by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment, upward). Further, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC based on the contents of the change command as the remaining number of times up to the high frequency support mode end reference number (55 times in FIG. 28A) on the symbol display device 51. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a right strike to the player.
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays a part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4B), as shown in FIG. By displaying the same symbol combination (“A” in the present embodiment) and indicating the stop result, the remaining symbol string (symbol column Z2) is variably displayed in this state, thereby reaching the reach display. Generate and move to the reach period.

  Thereafter, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 applies a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters ("AAA" in this embodiment) as the stop result as shown in FIG. The result of the lottery determination is notified by stopping and displaying on L.

After causing the MPU 102 to stop and display the combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters on the effective line L, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the blade member drive unit 401c as shown in FIG. The blade member 401a is set to an open state.
Further, the MPU 102 generates an effect for notifying the player of the opening of the blade member based on the blade member opening command received from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 and informs the player to make a right strike at the character's dialogue.

Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the variable entry execution mode, as shown in FIGS. 28D and 28E, based on the command for the variable entry execution mode received from the MPU 92.
In the effect for the variable pitch execution mode, the MPU 102, based on the V winning success command received from the MPU 92 when the game ball wins (V winning) in the right pitch entrance 404 in the variable pitch execution mode, As shown in FIG. 28D, an effect corresponding to the success of the V prize is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character “V” on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and notifies the player that the game ball has won (V win) at the right entrance 404. .
Further, in the production for the variable pitch execution mode, the MPU 102, based on the V winning failure command received from the MPU 92 when the game ball has not won (V winning) at the right pitch entrance 404, FIG. As shown in E), an effect corresponding to the V winning failure is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the word “sorry” on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 and informs the player that the game ball has not won (V prize) at the right entrance 404. Inform.

FIG. 29 is an enlarged view showing the periphery of the right side variable pitching mechanism.
The MPU 62 causes the MPU 102 to stop and display a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters on the effective line L, and then, as shown in FIGS. Is performed to set the blade member 401a to an open state (see arrow in the figure).

The MPU 62 sets the plate 403a to the open state by executing the drive control of the plate drive unit 403c as shown in FIG. 29B when 1 sec has elapsed after setting the blade member 401a to the open state. After setting (see the arrow in the figure) and elapse of a predetermined time (0.2 sec in the present embodiment), the plate 403a is set in the closed state (see the arrow in FIG. 29C).
Then, the MPU 62, as shown in FIG. 29C, when a game ball wins the right entrance 404 (V win) or when 2 sec elapses after the blade member 401a is set to the open state. The blade member 401a is set to a closed state by executing drive control of the blade member drive unit 401c (see the arrow in the figure).

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening / closing execution mode when a game ball wins (V winning) at the right entrance.
The MPU 102 responds to the success of the V winning as shown in FIG. 28D and FIG. 30A when the game ball wins (V winning) in the right entrance 404 in the variable pitch execution mode. Perform the production. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening / closing execution mode.

  In the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, or the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In step S2202, the effect A is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and makes a line “RUSH rush!” Of this character. To inform the player that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30C, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 30C) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a right strike to the player.

  On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If it is determined (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), an effect B is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S2204. In this effect B, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. ! ”Informs the player that the game result is“ low frequency support mode result ”(transition to special mode).

Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are consumed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value on the symbol display device 51 with the value of the game number counter RTC as the remaining number of times until the reference end number of the special mode (30 times in FIG. 30E) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest left-handedness to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times until the special mode end reference number is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an effect for game times when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. To shift to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the symbol fluctuation display by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment, upward). Further, the MPU 102 sets the value of the game number counter RTC to the remaining number of times up to the special mode end reference number (15 times in FIG. 31A) based on the contents of the change command, and displays the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Is displayed at the top left of Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest left-handedness to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times until the special mode end reference number is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

  After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays some symbol strings (the symbol string Z1 and the symbol string Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby combining the same symbol combinations ( In this embodiment, “2”) is displayed to indicate the stop result, and the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) is displayed in a variably state, thereby generating reach display and shifting to the reach period.

  Thereafter, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 applies a combination of symbols having the same number (“222” in the present embodiment) having the same number as the stop result, as shown in FIG. 31B. The result of the lottery determination is notified by stopping and displaying on L. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening / closing execution mode.

  In the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, or the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In step S2202, the effect A is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 31C, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and makes the line “RUSH rush!” Of this character. To inform the player that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode (100 in FIG. 31C) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a right strike to the player.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 digests 30 game times without being a “big hit win” in the winning / losing lottery, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode as shown in FIG.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. To shift to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the symbol fluctuation display by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment, upward).
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays a part of the symbol strings (the symbol string Z1 and the symbol string Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby combining the same symbol combinations. By displaying the result of the stop and indicating the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) in the state, the reach display is generated and the reach period is started.

  Thereafter, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 notifies the result of the lottery by stopping and displaying the combination of symbols having the same numbers on the active line L as the stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening / closing execution mode.

  In the determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, the effect A as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is determined in step S2202. Select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 31C, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and makes the line “RUSH rush!” Of this character. To inform the player that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode (100 in FIG. 31C) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a right strike to the player.

  On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If it is determined (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), an effect B is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S2204. In this effect B, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. ! ”Informs the player that the game result is“ low frequency support mode result ”(transition to special mode).

Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are consumed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the special mode end reference number (30 times in FIG. 31E) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest left-handedness to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times until the special mode end reference number is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to this embodiment as described above, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) In the normal mode and the high frequency support mode of the low frequency support mode, the main controller 60 shifts the gaming state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode based on the result of the internal lottery. In the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. You will be playing in the hope of staying. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) When the main control device 60 shifts the gaming state from the opening / closing execution mode to the normal control state, the main control device 60 shifts the gaming state to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. When shifting to the frequency support mode, attention is paid to whether or not the user is staying in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(3) The low frequency support mode has a higher probability of entering the upper operation port 36 than the lower operation port 37, and the high frequency support mode has a probability of entering the lower operation port 37 rather than the upper operation port 36. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player launches a game ball aiming at the upper operation port 36, and in the high frequency support mode, the player aims at the lower operation port 37 and fires the game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can clearly suggest the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode to the player.

(4) Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation port 37, the probability of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode was executed when the game ball entered the upper operation port 36. Based on the result of the internal lottery, it is higher than the probability of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, so the player expects to shift the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(5) The main controller 60 shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) The main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is digested 30 times after the game mode is transitioned to the special mode. Pay attention to the number of times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(7) The results of the internal lottery include a low-frequency support mode result for shifting the gaming state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and a high-frequency support mode result for shifting the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the gaming state to the high frequency support mode even if the low frequency support mode result is obtained, and has an opportunity to shift the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. Can be increased. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(8) The low-frequency support mode is a normal mode that shifts the gaming state to the low-frequency support mode when the low-frequency support mode result is obtained, and a gaming state that is the high-frequency support mode when the low-frequency support mode result is obtained. Therefore, even if the game state is changed to the low frequency support mode, the player is expected to stay in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(9) The low frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is higher than that of the normal mode, and the main controller 60 sets the game state to the low frequency support mode. When the game mode is changed, the game mode is changed to the special mode, and when the game state is changed to the high frequency support mode, the game mode is changed to the normal mode, so the player changes the game state to the low frequency support mode. Even in such a case, the game will be played with the expectation that the user is staying in the special mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(10) The gaming state is a low frequency of a high frequency support mode that makes it easy to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 and a special mode that makes it difficult to enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 40 compared to the high frequency support mode. Since the support mode is provided, it is possible to diversify the types of game states in which the game state can be shifted from the normal control state to the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(11) The gaming state is determined by launching a game ball toward the right-handed route, and a high-frequency support mode that is advantageous for the player, and by firing a game ball toward the right-handed route, Since the low-frequency support mode is a special mode that is disadvantageous for the player as compared to the frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode is changed from the normal control state when the game ball enters the right variable pitching mechanism 40. It is possible to diversify the types of game states that can be transferred to the game state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described are assigned the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  In the first embodiment, when the special win flag is set in the RAM 64 in the winning lottery and the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the gaming state is the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current gaming state. ), The mode was changed to the special mode. Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” and then determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (game mode) In the normal mode), the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1107. In other words, in the first embodiment, the MPU 62 always shifts to the special mode when shifting to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the MPU 62 shifts to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the MPU 62 executes a lottery to determine whether to shift to the special mode and wins the lottery. In this case, it is different from the first embodiment in that it shifts to the special mode.

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1113A as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes in and after step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when the distribution result is determined to be the “low frequency support mode result”), The process after step S1105 is executed.
First, in step S1101, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” (process after step S1102) will be described.

In step S1102, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes with different support modes that are shifted to after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a normal mode in which a support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends according to a distribution result of “low frequency support mode result” and “high frequency support mode result”, and “low frequency support mode result”. Regardless of the distribution result of “mode result” and “high frequency support mode result”, the game mode includes a special mode in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which of the normal mode and the special mode is the game mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, the game mode is set to the normal mode.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 game times that are the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC are consumed. The MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag when 100 game times have been consumed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” in step S1101 (process after step S1105) will be described.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when the distribution result is determined to be the “low frequency support mode result”), in step S1105, It is determined whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

  When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the special mode), the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102 described above. In other words, when the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution result of the “low frequency support mode result” and the “high frequency support mode result”. Set to support mode.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 in Step S1105 (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), it is stored in the RAM 64 in Step S1106. Clear the high frequency support flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

  In step S1109A, the MPU 62 executes a special mode lottery process. Specifically, in the lottery process in the special mode, the MPU 62 executes the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the special mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends with a predetermined probability (1/8 in the present embodiment).

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the probability of shifting to the special mode to 1/8, but may be larger than 1/8 or smaller than 1/8. Also, the MPU 62 reduces the probability of shifting to the special mode when, for example, the number of game times digested before becoming a “big hit win” in the winning lottery is smaller than a predetermined number, If the number of game times digested before becoming `` winning '' is greater than the predetermined number, the probability of shifting to the special mode may be increased, and the probability of shifting to the special mode depending on other gaming situations It may be varied.

In step S1110A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a special mode lottery has been won.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has been won, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1107 onward.

In step S1107, the MPU 62 sets a special mode flag in the RAM 64. When the special mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.
In step S1108, the MPU 62 sets “30” to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1111A, the MPU 62 sets a special mode command. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The special mode command includes information for causing the sound emission control device 90 to recognize that the game mode is set to the special mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the special mode command set in step S1111A to the sound emission control device 90.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the special mode based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode continues until 30 game times that are the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC are consumed. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when 30 game times are consumed. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
The MPU 62 clears the hold information stored in the second result display portion holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball in the lower operation port 37 after executing the process of step S1108.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1110A that the special mode lottery has not been won, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S1112A and subsequent steps.
In step S1112A, the MPU 62 clears the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In step S1113A, the MPU 62 sets “0” to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  As described above, when the winning lottery occurs and the allocation result becomes the “high frequency support mode result” in the allocation lottery, the gaming state is the open / close execution mode regardless of the current gaming state. After completion, shift to high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode does not occur in the lottery, and when 100 game times are consumed, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

  In addition, if the winning lottery occurs and the allocation result becomes “low frequency support mode result” in the allocation lottery, the gaming state is the opening / closing execution mode if the gaming mode is the special mode. After the end, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. If the game mode is the normal mode, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high frequency support mode does not occur in the lottery, and when 100 game times are consumed, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low-frequency support mode is continued until at least a win occurs in the winning lottery. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode becomes a special mode with a probability of 1/8 and becomes a normal mode with a probability of 7/8. In the case of the special mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are consumed, and then shifts to the normal mode.

  In addition, in the case where no win occurs in the winning / losing lottery, that is, in the case where the winning / failing result is a “normal failure result”, the gaming state does not shift.

  Here, the value of the game number counter RTC is included in the aforementioned change command. Information relating to the game mode (information relating to whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the above-described opening command.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
In the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 performs the low frequency operation based on the internal lottery result (the low frequency support mode result or the high frequency support mode result) in the normal mode and the high frequency support mode in the low frequency support mode. The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, since the player is expected to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but may have this.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 enters an opening / closing execution mode that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. When the gaming state is shifted from the normal control state and the gaming state is shifted from the opening / closing execution mode to the normal control state, the gaming state is shifted to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low-frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode. Can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the right variable pitching mechanism 40 launches toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game balls enter the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. It functions as a variable pitching mechanism that allows the gaming balls that have been entered to be pitched. The main controller 60 shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. Here, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation port 37, the probability (about 1 / 12.5) of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode via the variable entry execution mode is Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36, the probability of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode through the variable entry execution mode is higher (about 1/60). Yes. According to this, since the player expects to shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. Transition game mode. Specifically, when the main control device 60 shifts the gaming state to the low frequency support mode, the main control device 60 shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode or the special mode, and when shifting the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. The game mode is shifted to the normal mode. According to this, since the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to can be improved.
In this embodiment, when the main control device 60 shifts the gaming state to the low frequency support mode, the main control device 60 shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode or the special mode, and shifts the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. However, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 changes the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then a predetermined number of game times (30 times in the present embodiment) are consumed. Transition. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game has been digested, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In this embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is digested 30 times after shifting the game mode to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times is consumed. For example, the number of game times is divided into a plurality of times such as 30 times and 50 times. You may do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is digested 30 times after shifting the game mode to the special mode. As a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, when the number of “small winning” exceeds a predetermined number, the game mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode. You may make it transfer.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is digested 30 times after shifting the game mode to the special mode. When a game ball is fired toward the right-handed route, the game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode. In other words, the main control device 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when a game ball is launched toward the right-handed route while staying in the special mode. According to this, in the high-frequency support mode, the player launches a game ball toward the right-handed route, and in the special-mode low-frequency support mode, the player launches a game ball toward the left-handed route. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player, and can make the player play the game comfortably.

In this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the gaming state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is a high-frequency support mode. It functions as a second lottery result for shifting the gaming state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode even when the low-frequency support mode result is obtained, and increase the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
The low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode that shifts the gaming state to the low-frequency support mode when the low-frequency support mode results, and a high-frequency support mode when the low-frequency support mode results. Special mode for transition. According to this, since the player is expected to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that in the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, since the player is expected to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the probability that the special mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode is 100% higher than that in the normal mode, but may not be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the main control device 60 switches the game from the normal control state to the opening / closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is changed and the game state is changed from the opening / closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is changed to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when the game state shifts from the opening / closing execution mode to the normal control state. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing. For example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the game times.

In the present embodiment, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode functions as special mode lottery means for executing a special mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode. Then, main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. According to this, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Will pay attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is performed in the special mode lottery process in the special mode lottery process in step S1109A. A special mode lottery may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 33 shows a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process to execute an effect for game times, an effect for a variable pitch execution mode, an effect for an opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 92 executes the processes in steps S2101 to S2111 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes in and after step S2112.

  In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2117A.
In contrast, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, the MPU 92 determines the type of the distribution result in step S2113 based on the contents of the opening command.

  In step S2114A, the MPU 92 executes an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the distribution result determined in step S2113.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode in order to determine an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204A as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is a “high frequency support mode result”.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S2202. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when the distribution result is determined to be the “low frequency support mode result”), In step S2203, based on the contents of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode when the “hit and win” is selected in the winning / losing lottery is the special mode.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 92 executes the processing after step S2202 described above, and selects the effect A as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in Step S2203 (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 92 produces an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in Step S2204A. Select B1. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
The duration time of the effects A and the effects B1 corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the opening / closing execution mode.

  Further, the MPU 92 performs the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selection result of the effect A and the effect B1.

Here, the effect B1 of the present embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the production B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and the line “30 chances of the 30 rotations” of the character. ! ”Was notified to the player that the game result is the“ low frequency support mode result ”(transition to the special mode) (see FIG. 30D and FIG. 31E).
On the other hand, in the production B1 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display a character or a line of this character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and does not display a character in a special mode. This is different from the effect B of the first embodiment in that it is not notified that the process is shifted to the above.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the process after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an opening / closing execution mode command including information related to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected in step S2114A. The opening / closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  Based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  After executing the process of step S2115 or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2117A.

  In step S2117A, the MPU 92 determines whether a special mode command has been received.

  If the MPU 92 determines that the special mode command is received in step S2117A, the MPU 92 executes special mode notification processing in step S2118A based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  Based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 reads a data table for notifying the player of the transition to the special mode from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player of the transition to the special mode. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and specially informs the player in the character's line “30 Chance Zone!”. Notify that the mode will be changed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2117A that it has not received the special mode command, the MPU 92 executes the processes in and after step S2116.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a game result and a game state or the like. Specifically, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding “normally lost result” and the game state and the like, in which the game results are arranged in the column direction, and the game states and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 35, the pachinko machine 10 has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has distribution results of “high frequency support mode result” and “low frequency support mode result” as game results excluding “normal outage result”.

  Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normally lost result” and the game state will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the gaming result and the gaming state as follows, but the combination of the gaming result and the gaming state, the contents of the gaming result, and The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, the contents such as the game state differ depending on the game results of the “high frequency support mode result” and the “low frequency support mode result”.
Specifically, in the “high frequency support mode result”, the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times. In addition, in the “high frequency support mode result” based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect A. . In the “high frequency support mode result” based on the winning of the lower working port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetical characters, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect A. Further, in the “high frequency support mode result”, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. The next game mode is the normal mode.

  Further, in the “low frequency support mode result”, the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times. In addition, in the “low frequency support mode result” based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect B1. . In the “low frequency support mode result” based on the winning to the lower working port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetical characters, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect B1. Further, in the “low frequency support mode result”, the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. The next game mode is “special mode” with a probability of 1/8 and “normal mode” with a probability of 7/8.

In contrast, in the game mode of “special mode”, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of “high frequency support mode result” and “low frequency support mode result”.
Specifically, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the game result based on the winning to the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same numbers, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect A. Further, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. The next game mode is the normal mode.

  Therefore, the player grasps that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” or the “low frequency support mode result” by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<About the flow after the game ball enters the right-hand variable pitching mechanism>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening / closing execution mode when a game ball wins (V winning) at the right entrance.
When the game ball wins (V winning) in the right entrance 404 in the variable winning execution mode, the MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to the success of the V winning as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening / closing execution mode.

  In the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, or the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In step S2202, the effect A is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and makes a line “RUSH rush!” Of this character. To inform the player that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36C, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode (100 in FIG. 36C) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a right strike to the player.

  On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If it is determined (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204A, the effect B1 is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

  If the MPU 62 determines that the special mode lottery has been won in step S1110A, the MPU 62 sets a special mode command in step S1111A, and the MPU 92 receives the special mode command in step S2117A. If it is determined, in step S2118A, special mode notification processing is executed based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 after the opening / closing execution mode ends, as shown in FIG. The player will be informed of the transition to the special mode at "30 turn chance zone!"

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special mode lottery has not been won in step S1110A, the MPU 102 does not set the special mode command, so the MPU 102 displays the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A character or a line of the character is not displayed on the screen G, and the player is not informed of the transition to the special mode (not shown).
In this embodiment, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the display mode G of the symbol display device 51 is not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 and shifts to the special mode at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. By not doing so, he was informed that he did not win the special mode lottery. On the other hand, the MPU 102 displays a character or a line of the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and disguises it as if it was won in the special mode lottery. Also good. According to this, the player can play a game while enjoying prediction of whether or not the special mode lottery has been won.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36E, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode becomes a special mode with a probability of 1/8 and becomes a normal mode with a probability of 7/8. In the case of the special mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are consumed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value on the symbol display device 51 with the value of the game number counter RTC as the remaining number of times until the reference end number of the special mode (30 times in FIG. 36E) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest left-handedness to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times until the special mode end reference number is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an effect for game times when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. To shift to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the symbol fluctuation display by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment, upward). Further, the MPU 102 sets the value of the game number counter RTC to the remaining number of times up to the special mode end reference number (15 times in FIG. 37A) based on the contents of the change command, and displays the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Is displayed at the top left of Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest left-handedness to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times until the special mode end reference number is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

  After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays some symbol strings (the symbol string Z1 and the symbol string Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby combining the same symbol combinations ( In this embodiment, “2”) is displayed to indicate the stop result, and the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) is displayed in a variably state, thereby generating reach display and shifting to the reach period.

  Thereafter, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 applies a combination of symbols having the same number (“222” in the present embodiment) having the same number as the stop result as shown in FIG. 37 (B). The result of the lottery determination is notified by stopping and displaying on L. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening / closing execution mode.

  In the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, or the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In step S2202, the effect A is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 37C, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and makes a line “RUSH rush!” Of this character. To inform the player that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 37C) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a right strike to the player.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 digests 30 game times without being a “big hit winning” in the winning / losing lottery, as shown in FIG.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. To shift to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the symbol fluctuation display by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment, upward).
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays a part of the symbol strings (the symbol string Z1 and the symbol string Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby combining the same symbol combinations. By displaying the result of the stop and indicating the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) in the state, the reach display is generated and the reach period is started.

  Thereafter, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 notifies the result of the lottery by stopping and displaying the combination of symbols having the same numbers on the active line L as the stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening / closing execution mode.

In the process for determining the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, the effect A as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is determined in step S2202. Select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 37C, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and makes a line “RUSH rush!” Of this character. To inform the player that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.
Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a symbol based on the contents of the change command, with the value of the game number counter RTC as the remaining number of times up to the high frequency support mode end reference number (100 times in FIG. 37C). It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a right strike to the player.

  On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If it is determined (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204A, the effect B1 is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

  If the MPU 62 determines that the special mode lottery has been won in step S1110A, the MPU 62 sets a special mode command in step S1111A, and the MPU 92 receives the special mode command in step S2117A. If it is determined, in step S2118A, special mode notification processing is executed based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and also displays the character's line “30-turn chance zone!” Then, the player is notified that the mode is changed to the special mode (see FIG. 36D). Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest left-handedness to the player.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special mode lottery is not won in step S1110A, the MPU 102 does not set the special mode command, so that the MPU 102 executes opening / closing as shown in FIG. At the end of the mode, the character and the lines of this character are not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the player is not informed of the transition to the special mode.
In this embodiment, the MPU 102 notifies the player that the display mode G of the symbol display device 51 is not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 and shifts to the special mode at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. By not doing so, he was informed that he did not win the special mode lottery. On the other hand, the MPU 102 displays a character or a line of the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and disguises it as if it was won in the special mode lottery. Also good. According to this, the player can play a game while enjoying prediction of whether or not the special mode lottery has been won.

Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode becomes a special mode with a probability of 1/8 and becomes a normal mode with a probability of 7/8. In the case of the special mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are consumed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as the remaining number of times up to the special mode end reference number based on the contents of the change command. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest left-handedness to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times until the special mode end reference number is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to such this embodiment, the same operation and effect as (1)-(4), (5)-(8), (10), (11) in the 1st embodiment can be produced. In addition, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(12) The main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. We will pay attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described are assigned the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

In the first embodiment, when the special win flag is set in the RAM 64 in the winning lottery and the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the gaming state is the opening / closing execution mode (ie, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current gaming state. ), It was in special mode. When the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, this special mode is continued until 30 game times that are the reference end times set in the game number counter RTC are consumed.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to continue the special mode every time the game times are digested after shifting to the special mode, and when the lottery is not won. Is different from the first embodiment in that it shifts to the normal mode.

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the transition process and the change end process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode are different from those in the first embodiment. The contents of the transition process and the change end process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1107 as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is terminated without performing the process of step S1108 after performing the process of step S1107.

<Change end processing>
FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the change end process.
In the change end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1310B as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 executes the processes in steps S1301 to S1305 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then executes the processes in and after step S1306.

After executing the process of step S1305, if it is determined in step S1302 that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, or if it is determined in step S1304 that the game number counter RTC is not less than “0”, the MPU 62 In step S1306, it is determined whether or not the game mode is a special mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the game mode is not the special mode (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 62 ends the variation end process without executing the processes after step S1307B. .
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 executes a special mode continuous lottery process in step S1307B. Specifically, in the special mode continuous lottery process, the MPU 62 executes a lottery on whether or not to continue the special mode with a predetermined probability (29/30 in the present embodiment) after the end of the game.

  In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the probability of continuing the special mode to 29/30 (the probability of shifting to the normal mode is 1/30), but it may be greater than 29/30 or less than 29/30. May be. Also, the MPU 62 reduces the probability of continuing the special mode when, for example, the number of game times digested before becoming a “big win” is smaller than a predetermined number, If the number of game times digested before becoming `` winning '' is greater than the predetermined number, the probability of continuing the special mode may be increased, and the probability of continuing the special mode according to other gaming situations It may be varied.

In step S1308B, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special mode continuous lottery has been won.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the special mode continuous lottery has been won, the MPU 62 ends the variation end process without executing the processes in and after step S1309.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that the special mode continuous lottery has not been won, the MPU 62 clears the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1309. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
In step S1310B, the MPU 62 sets a normal mode command. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the variation end process. This normal mode command includes information for causing the sound emission control device 90 to recognize that the game mode is set to the normal mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the normal mode command set in step S1310B to the sound emission control device 90.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the normal mode based on the normal mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

  As described above, when the special win flag is set in the RAM 64 in the winning / no-win lottery, the gaming state ends the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current gaming state. Later, it shifts to the special mode. The special mode is continued if the continuous lottery process in the special mode in step S1307B is won.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
In the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 performs the low frequency operation based on the internal lottery result (the low frequency support mode result or the high frequency support mode result) in the normal mode and the high frequency support mode in the low frequency support mode. The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, since the player is expected to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but may have this.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 enters an opening / closing execution mode that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. When the gaming state is shifted from the normal control state and the gaming state is shifted from the opening / closing execution mode to the normal control state, the gaming state is shifted to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low-frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode. Can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the right variable pitching mechanism 40 launches toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game balls enter the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. It functions as a variable pitching mechanism that allows the gaming balls that have been entered to be pitched. The main controller 60 shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. Here, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation port 37, the probability (about 1 / 12.5) of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode via the variable entry execution mode is Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36, the probability of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode through the variable entry execution mode is higher (about 1/60). Yes. According to this, since the player expects to shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. Transition game mode. Specifically, the main controller 60 shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when shifting the gaming state to the low frequency support mode, and shifts to the normal mode when shifting the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. The game mode is shifted to. According to this, since the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when shifting the gaming state to the low frequency support mode, and shifts the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. Although the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the change end process is a normal mode lottery unit that performs a normal mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the special mode. Function as. The main controller 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won. According to this, since the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is changed to the special mode and the normal mode lottery in which the probability of continuing the special mode is set to 29/30 is not won. Although the game mode is shifted to the mode, for example, the probability of continuing the special mode may be set by being divided into a plurality of probabilities such as 29/30 and 28/30.

In this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the gaming state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is a high-frequency support mode. It functions as a second lottery result for shifting the gaming state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode even when the low-frequency support mode result is obtained, and increase the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
The low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode that shifts the gaming state to the low-frequency support mode when the low-frequency support mode results, and a high-frequency support mode when the low-frequency support mode results. Special mode for transition. According to this, since the player is expected to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that in the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, since the player is expected to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the probability that the special mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode is 100% higher than that in the normal mode, but may not be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the main control device 60 switches the game from the normal control state to the opening / closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is changed and the game state is changed from the opening / closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is changed to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when the game state shifts from the opening / closing execution mode to the normal control state. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing. For example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the game times.

  In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 40 shows a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process to execute an effect for game times, an effect for a variable pitch execution mode, an effect for an opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and thereafter executes the processes after step S2112.

  In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2119B.
In contrast, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, the MPU 92 determines the type of the distribution result in step S2113 based on the contents of the opening command.

  In step S2114B, the MPU 92 executes an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the distribution result determined in step S2113.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode in order to determine an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204B as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is a “high frequency support mode result”.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S2202. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when the distribution result is determined to be the “low frequency support mode result”), In step S2203, based on the contents of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode when the “hit and win” is selected in the winning / losing lottery is the special mode.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 92 executes the processing after step S2202 described above, and selects the effect A as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in Step S2203 (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 92 produces an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in Step S2204B. Select B2. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
The duration time of the effects A and the effects B2 corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the opening / closing execution mode.

  Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selection result of the effect A and the effect B2.

Here, the effect B2 of the present embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the production B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and the line “30 chances of the 30 rotations” of the character. ! ”Was notified to the player that the game result is the“ low frequency support mode result ”(transition to the special mode) (see FIG. 30D and FIG. 31E).
On the other hand, in the production B2 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and at the character's dialogue “Enter the chance zone!” This is different from the production B of the first embodiment in that the game result is notified to the player that the game result is the “low frequency support mode result” (the transition to the special mode).

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the process after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an opening / closing execution mode command including information related to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected in step S2114B. The opening / closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  Based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  After executing the process of step S2115 or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2119B.

  In step S2119B, the MPU 92 determines whether a normal mode command has been received.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S2119B that the normal mode command has been received, the MPU 92 executes normal mode notification processing in step S2120B based on the content of the normal mode command. In this normal mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a normal mode notification command. This normal mode notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  Based on the normal mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 reads a data table for notifying the player that the mode is changed to the normal mode from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player of the transition to the normal mode. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 and informs the player that the mode will be shifted to the normal mode at the “chance zone end” of the character.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2119B that it has not received the normal mode command, the MPU 92 executes the processes in and after step S2116.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a game result and a game state or the like. Specifically, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding “normally lost result” and the game state and the like, in which the game result is arranged in the column direction, and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 42, the pachinko machine 10 has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has distribution results of “high frequency support mode result” and “low frequency support mode result” as game results excluding “normal outage result”.

  Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normally lost result” and the game state will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the gaming result and the gaming state as follows, but the combination of the gaming result and the gaming state, the contents of the gaming result, and The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, the contents such as the game state differ depending on the game results of the “high frequency support mode result” and the “low frequency support mode result”.
Specifically, in the “high frequency support mode result”, the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times. In addition, in the “high frequency support mode result” based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect A. . In the “high frequency support mode result” based on the winning of the lower working port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetical characters, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect A. Further, in the “high frequency support mode result”, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. The next game mode is the normal mode.

  Further, in the “low frequency support mode result”, the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times. In addition, in the “low frequency support mode result” based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect B2. . In the “low frequency support mode result” based on the winning to the lower operating port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetical characters, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect B2. Further, in the “low frequency support mode result”, the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. The next game mode is the “special mode”.

In contrast, in the game mode of “special mode”, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of “high frequency support mode result” and “low frequency support mode result”.
Specifically, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the game result based on the winning to the upper operating port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same numbers, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect A. Further, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. The next game mode is the normal mode.

  Therefore, the player grasps that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” or the “low frequency support mode result” by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<About the flow after the game ball enters the right-hand variable pitching mechanism>
FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an effect for the opening / closing execution mode when a game ball wins (V winning) at the right entrance.
When the game ball is won (V winning) at the right entrance 404 in the variable pitching execution mode, the MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to the success of the V winning as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening / closing execution mode.

  In the determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, the effect A as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is determined in step S2202. Select. In this effect A, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode as shown in FIG. To inform the player that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol as the remaining number of times up to the end frequency of the high frequency support mode (100 in FIG. 43C) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a right strike to the player.

  On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If it is determined (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204B, the effect B2 is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In this effect B2, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and the character's dialogue “Enter a chance zone!” The game result is notified to the player that the game result is “low frequency support mode result” (transition to the special mode).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (E), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode continues in the special mode if the continuous lottery processing in the special mode in step S1307B is won, and shifts to the normal mode if not won. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest left-handedness to the player.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an effect for game times when staying in the special mode.
In the special mode, the MPU 102 starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. To shift to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the symbol fluctuation display by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment, upward).
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops displaying a part of the symbol strings (the symbol string Z1 and the symbol string Z3) on the active line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby combining the same symbol combinations ( In this embodiment, “2”) is displayed to indicate the stop result, and the remaining symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2) is displayed in a variably state, thereby generating a reach display and shifting to the reach period.

  Thereafter, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 applies a combination of symbols having the same number (“222” in the present embodiment) having the same number as the stop result as shown in FIG. 44 (B). The result of the lottery determination is notified by stopping and displaying on L. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening / closing execution mode.

  In the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, or the game mode is the special mode in step S2203. In step S2202, the effect A is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In other words, in the special mode, the effect A is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode regardless of the content of the game result. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and makes a line “RUSH rush!” Of this character. To inform the player that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 44C) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a right strike to the player.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode if the special mode continuous lottery processing in step S1307B is not won.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1308B that it has not won the special mode continuous lottery, it sets a normal mode command in step S1310B, and the MPU 92 receives the normal mode command in step S2119B. If it is determined that, the normal mode notification process is executed based on the content of the normal mode command in step S2120B. In this normal mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a normal mode notification command. This normal mode notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

Based on the normal mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as shown in FIG. To inform the player of the transition to the normal mode.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44E, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal mode.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the continuous lottery in the special mode is won in step S1308B, the MPU 102 does not set the normal mode command. Therefore, the MPU 102 displays characters and the like on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. The character's dialogue is not displayed, and the player is not informed of the transition to the normal mode. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest left-handedness to the player.

In the normal mode, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. To shift to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the symbol fluctuation display by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment, upward).
After the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, the MPU 102 stops and displays a part of the symbol strings (the symbol string Z1 and the symbol string Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4A), thereby combining the same symbol combinations. By displaying the result of the stop and indicating the remaining symbol row (symbol row Z2) in the state, the reach display is generated and the reach period is started.

  Thereafter, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 notifies the result of the lottery by stopping and displaying the combination of symbols having the same numbers on the active line L as the stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening / closing execution mode.

In the process for determining the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, the effect A as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is determined in step S2202. Select. In this effect A, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and makes the line “RUSH rush!” Of this character. To inform the player that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”.
Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 44C) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a right strike to the player.

  On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If it is determined (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S2204B, the effect B2 is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In this effect B2, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and the character's dialogue “Enter a chance zone!” The game result is notified to the player that the game result is “low frequency support mode result” (transition to the special mode).

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode continues in the special mode if the continuous lottery processing in the special mode in step S1307B is won, and shifts to the normal mode if not won. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest left-handedness to the player.

According to this embodiment, the following operations and effects can be obtained in addition to the same operations and effects as (1) to (5) and (7) to (11) in the first embodiment. Can play.
(13) Since the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described are assigned the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

In the first embodiment, when the special win flag is set in the RAM 64 in the winning lottery and the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the gaming state is the opening / closing execution mode (ie, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current gaming state. ), It was in special mode. When the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, this special mode is continued until 30 game times that are the reference end times set in the game number counter RTC are consumed.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the special mode, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, 30 or 50 game times that are the reference end times set in the game number counter RTC are obtained. It differs from the first embodiment in that it continues until digestion.

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1110C as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes in and after step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when the distribution result is determined to be the “low frequency support mode result”), The process after step S1105 is executed.
First, in step S1101, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” (process after step S1102) will be described.

In step S1102, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1103, the special mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of game modes with different support modes that are shifted to after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a normal mode in which a support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends according to a distribution result of “low frequency support mode result” and “high frequency support mode result”, and “low frequency support mode result”. Regardless of the distribution result of “mode result” and “high frequency support mode result”, the game mode includes a special mode in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  The special mode flag is a flag for specifying which of the normal mode and the special mode is the game mode. In step S1103, since the MPU 62 has cleared the special mode flag, the game mode is set to the normal mode.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 game times that are the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC are consumed. The MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag when 100 game times have been consumed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” in step S1101 (process after step S1105) will be described.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when the distribution result is determined to be the “low frequency support mode result”), in step S1105, It is determined whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

  When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the special mode), the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102 described above. In other words, when the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the distribution result of the “low frequency support mode result” and the “high frequency support mode result”. Set to support mode.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the special mode flag is not set in the RAM 64 (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), in step S1109C, the game number counter setting is performed. Execute the process. The game number counter setting process will be described in detail later.

In step S1106, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
In step S1107, the MPU 62 sets a special mode flag in the RAM 64. When the special mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the special mode.

In step S1110C, the MPU 62 sets a special mode command. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The special mode command includes information for causing the sound emission control device 90 to recognize that the game mode is set to the special mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the special mode command set in step S1110C to the sound emission control device 90.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the special mode based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game number counter setting process.
In the game number counter setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1401 to S1404 as shown in FIG.
In step S1401, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the support mode when the “big hit win” or “small win win” is the high frequency support mode in the winning / losing lottery.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the game number counter RTC is “90” or more in step S1402. In other words, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it has been “small winning winning” in the winning / losing lottery before shifting to the high frequency support mode and digesting 10 game times.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1402 that the value of the game number counter RTC is “90” or more, in step S1403, the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to “50”. "Is set. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  On the other hand, the MPU 62 determines that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode in step S1401 (when the support mode is determined to be the low frequency support mode), or the game number counter in step S1402. If it is determined that the RTC value is not “90” or more, in step S1404, “30” is set to the value of the game number counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

Here, when the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64, the special mode continues until 30 or 50 game times that are the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC are consumed. The MPU 62 clears the special mode flag when it has consumed 30 or 50 game times. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the game mode to the normal mode.
Here, information relating to the number of times the special mode is continued (30 times or 50 times) is included in the special mode command described above.
In addition, after performing the process of step S1107, the MPU 62 clears the hold information stored in the second result display portion hold area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37.

  As described above, when the winning lottery occurs and the allocation result becomes the “high frequency support mode result” in the allocation lottery, the gaming state is the open / close execution mode regardless of the current gaming state. After completion, shift to high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode does not occur in the lottery, and when 100 game times are consumed, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode.

  In addition, if the winning lottery occurs and the allocation result becomes “low frequency support mode result” in the allocation lottery, the gaming state is the opening / closing execution mode if the gaming mode is the special mode. After the end, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. If the game mode is the normal mode, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high frequency support mode does not occur in the lottery, and when 100 game times are consumed, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode is always the normal mode. The low-frequency support mode is continued until at least a win occurs in the winning lottery. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 or 50 game times are consumed, and then shifts to the normal mode.

  In addition, in the case where no win occurs in the winning / losing lottery, that is, in the case where the winning / failing result is a “normal failure result”, the gaming state does not shift.

  Here, the value of the game number counter RTC is included in the change command and the special mode command described above. Information relating to the game mode (information relating to whether or not the special mode flag is set in the RAM 64) is included in the above-described opening command.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state based on the result of the internal lottery.
In the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 performs the low frequency operation based on the internal lottery result (the low frequency support mode result or the high frequency support mode result) in the normal mode and the high frequency support mode in the low frequency support mode. The game state is shifted to either the support mode or the high frequency support mode, and in the special mode of the low frequency support mode, the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode regardless of the result of the internal lottery. According to this, since the player is expected to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode does not have the game mode of the special mode, but may have this.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 enters an opening / closing execution mode that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. When the gaming state is shifted from the normal control state and the gaming state is shifted from the opening / closing execution mode to the normal control state, the gaming state is shifted to either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player shifts to the low-frequency support mode, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode. Can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the right variable pitching mechanism 40 launches toward the right-handed route based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game balls enter the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. It functions as a variable pitching mechanism that allows the gaming balls that have been entered to be pitched. The main controller 60 shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the opening / closing execution mode when the game ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 40. Here, based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation port 37, the probability (about 1 / 12.5) of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode via the variable entry execution mode is Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36, the probability of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode through the variable entry execution mode is higher (about 1/60). Yes. According to this, since the player expects to shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37. Transition game mode. Specifically, the main controller 60 shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when shifting the gaming state to the low frequency support mode, and shifts to the normal mode when shifting the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. The game mode is shifted to. According to this, since the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the gaming mode to the special mode when shifting the gaming state to the low frequency support mode, and shifts the gaming state to the high frequency support mode. Although the game mode is shifted to the normal mode, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode based on other conditions.

In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 switches from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then a predetermined number of game times (30 times or 50 times in the present embodiment) are consumed. Transition game mode. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game has been digested, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is digested 30 times or 50 times after the game mode is shifted to the special mode. The game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times other than the above is exhausted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is digested 30 times or 50 times after shifting the game mode to the special mode. For example, as a result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37, when the number of times that “winning a small hit” exceeds a predetermined number, the special mode is changed to the normal mode. You may make it transfer game mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is digested 30 times or 50 times after shifting the game mode to the special mode. For example, the game mode may be shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when a game ball is launched toward the right-handed route. In other words, the main control device 60 may end the special mode as a penalty when a game ball is launched toward the right-handed route while staying in the special mode. According to this, in the high-frequency support mode, the player launches a game ball toward the right-handed route, and in the special-mode low-frequency support mode, the player launches a game ball toward the left-handed route. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the intention of the player, and can make the player play the game comfortably.

In this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode result functions as a first lottery result for shifting the gaming state to either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode result is a high-frequency support mode. It functions as a second lottery result for shifting the gaming state to the support mode. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode even when the low-frequency support mode result is obtained, and increase the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
The low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode that shifts the gaming state to the low-frequency support mode when the low-frequency support mode results, and a high-frequency support mode when the low-frequency support mode results. Special mode for transition. According to this, since the player is expected to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, the low-frequency support mode includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than that in the normal mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special mode has a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode. According to this, since the player is expected to stay in the special mode even when the game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the probability that the special mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode is 100% higher than that in the normal mode, but may not be 100%. In short, the special mode only needs to have a higher probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode than the normal mode.

Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the main control device 60 switches the game from the normal control state to the opening / closing execution mode advantageous to the player. When the state is changed and the game state is changed from the opening / closing execution mode to the normal control state, the game mode is changed to either the normal mode or the special mode.
In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when the game state shifts from the opening / closing execution mode to the normal control state. The game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode at the timing. For example, the game mode may be shifted to either the normal mode or the special mode during the game times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 determines the number of game times consumed until the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode after shifting the game state to the high frequency support mode, and the end reference number (this embodiment). Based on the result of comparison with a threshold value set to a smaller number of times (90 times in this embodiment) than 50 times, the special mode (advantageous game situation) that is advantageous to the player and the advantageous side The game is divided into 30 special modes (disadvantage game situation) that are more disadvantageous to the player than the game situation. According to this, since the player pays attention to the number of times the game has been digested after shifting the gaming state to the high frequency support mode and then shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 A player's attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the advantageous game situation is set to 50 special modes and the disadvantaged game situation is set to 30 special modes. For example, by differentiating the probability of winning a “big win” in the winning lottery The advantageous game situation and the disadvantageous game situation may be set. In short, the advantageous game situation may be a game situation that is advantageous for the player, and the disadvantageous game situation may be a game situation that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 sets the number of times that the game times are consumed until the game state is changed to the opening / closing execution mode after the game state is changed to the high frequency support mode to a number smaller than the end reference number. When it is smaller than the set threshold value, it is assigned to the advantageous game situation, and when it is larger, it is assigned to the disadvantaged game situation. According to this, since the player pays attention to the game times up to the threshold set to the number of times smaller than the end reference number after shifting the gaming state to the high frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, after the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode, the number of game times consumed until the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode, and a threshold set to a number smaller than the end reference number of times, If it is smaller than this threshold, it is assigned to the advantageous game situation, and if it is larger, it is assigned to the disadvantaged game situation. In addition, it may be distributed to the disadvantaged game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special mode has an advantageous game situation in which the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the game times of 50 times (predetermined number) are consumed, and less than the predetermined number of times. A disadvantageous game situation in which the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times is consumed. According to this, in the special mode of 30 times, the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the game times less than 50 times are consumed, so that the player is compared with the special mode of 50 times. It can be a disadvantageous game situation for the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after shifting the game mode to the special mode in the main controller 60. A normal mode lottery means for executing mode lottery is provided, and the main controller 60 may shift the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won. In this case, the special mode may have an advantageous game situation with a low probability of winning the normal mode lottery and a disadvantaged game situation with a high probability of winning the normal mode lottery.
According to this, since the main control device 60 shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Also, since the disadvantageous gaming situation has a high probability of winning the normal mode lottery, the gaming situation can be disadvantageous for the player as compared to the advantageous gaming situation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

  In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 47 shows a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process to execute an effect for game times, an effect for a variable pitch execution mode, an effect for an opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 47, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2101 to S2111 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and thereafter executes the processes after step S2112.

  In step S2112, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2117C.
In contrast, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2112 that the opening command has been received, the MPU 92 determines the type of the distribution result in step S2113 based on the contents of the opening command.

  In step S2114C, the MPU 92 executes an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the distribution result determined in step S2113.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determining process for the opening / closing execution mode.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode in order to determine an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204C as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the distribution result determined in step S2113 is a “high frequency support mode result”.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect A3 as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S2202C. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the distribution result is not the “high frequency support mode result” (when the distribution result is determined to be the “low frequency support mode result”), In step S2203, based on the contents of the opening command, it is determined whether or not the game mode when the “hit and win” is selected in the winning / losing lottery is the special mode.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the game mode is the special mode, the MPU 92 executes the processing after step S2202C described above, and selects the effect A3 as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the game mode is not the special mode in Step S2203 (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the MPU 92 produces an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in Step S2204C. Select B3. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode.
The duration time of the effects A3 and the effects B3 corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the opening / closing execution mode.

  Further, the MPU 92 performs the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selection result of the effect A3 and the effect B3.

Here, the effect A3 of the present embodiment is different from the effect A of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the production A of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and the line “RUSH rush!” Of this character. Thus, the player is informed that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” (shifting to the normal mode) (see FIGS. 30B and 31C).
On the other hand, in the production A3 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and the line “RUSH rush! If you win, you will get a bonus! ”To inform the player that the game result is“ High Frequency Support Mode Result ”(to shift to the normal mode) and win within 10 rotations. The subsequent special mode is different from the effect A of the first embodiment in that it notifies that 50 game times are continued.

Further, the effect B3 of the present embodiment is different from the effect B of the first embodiment.
Specifically, in the production B of the first embodiment, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and the line “30 chances of the 30 rotations” of the character. ! ”Was notified to the player that the game result is the“ low frequency support mode result ”(transition to the special mode) (see FIG. 30D and FIG. 31E).
On the other hand, in the production B3 of the present embodiment, the MPU 102 does not display the character or the line of this character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and does not display the character in the special mode for the player. This is different from the effect B of the first embodiment in that it is not notified that the process is shifted to the above.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the process after step S2115 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets an opening / closing execution mode command including information related to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected in step S2114C. The opening / closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  Based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  After executing the process of step S2115 or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2112, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2117C.

  In step S2117C, the MPU 92 determines whether a special mode command has been received.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that a special mode command has been received, the MPU 92 executes special mode notification processing in step S2118C based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above. Here, the special mode command includes the value of the game number counter RTC.

  Based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 reads a data table for notifying the player of the transition to the special mode from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player of the transition to the special mode. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode and, based on the special mode notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, the character “30 rotations”. The player is informed of the transition to the special mode at “Chance Zone!” Or “50 Chance Chance Zone!”.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines that the special mode command has not been received in step S2117C, the MPU 92 executes the processes in and after step S2116.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a game result and a game state or the like. Specifically, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding “normally lost result” and the game state and the like, in which the game result is arranged in the column direction, and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 49, the pachinko machine 10 has a game mode of a normal mode and a special mode. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has distribution results of “high frequency support mode result” and “low frequency support mode result” as game results excluding “normal outage result”.

  Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normally lost result” and the game state will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the gaming result and the gaming state as follows, but the combination of the gaming result and the gaming state, the contents of the gaming result, and The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the game mode of the normal mode, the contents such as the game state differ depending on the game results of the “high frequency support mode result” and the “low frequency support mode result”.
Specifically, in the “high frequency support mode result”, the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times. In addition, in the “high frequency support mode result” based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect A3. . In the “high frequency support mode result” based on the winning to the lower operating port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetical characters, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect A3. Further, in the “high frequency support mode result”, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. The next game mode is the normal mode.

  Further, in the “low frequency support mode result”, the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times. In addition, in the “low frequency support mode result” based on the winning to the upper working port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect B3. . In the “low frequency support mode result” based on the winning to the lower working port 37, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same alphabetical characters, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect B3. Further, in the “low frequency support mode result”, the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. The next game mode is the “special mode”.

In contrast, in the game mode of “special mode”, the contents of the game state and the like are the same regardless of the game results of “high frequency support mode result” and “low frequency support mode result”.
Specifically, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times. Further, in the game result based on the winning at the upper working port 36, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect A3. Further, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. The next game mode is the normal mode.

  Therefore, the player grasps that the distribution result is the “high frequency support mode result” or the “low frequency support mode result” by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp that the next game mode is the normal mode or the special mode.

<About the flow after the game ball enters the right-hand variable pitching mechanism>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an effect for the opening / closing execution mode when a game ball wins (V winning) at the right entrance.
The MPU 102 responds to the success of the V winning as shown in FIG. 28D and FIG. 50A when the game ball wins (V winning) in the right entrance 404 in the variable winning execution mode. Perform the production. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening / closing execution mode.

  In the determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, the effect A3 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S2202C. Select. In this effect A3, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and the line “RUSH rush! "If you win within, you will get a bonus!" Informs the player that the game result is "High Frequency Support Mode Result" (to shift to normal mode) and win within 10 revolutions. For example, it is notified that the subsequent special mode is continued until 50 game times are consumed.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 50C) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a right strike to the player.

  On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If it is determined (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the effect B3 is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S2204C.

  When the MPU 62 determines that the value of the game number counter RTC is not “90” or more in step S1402 (see FIG. 28A), the MPU 62 is provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1404. “30” is set to the value of the number-of-games counter RTC, and a special mode command is set in step S1110C. If the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that a special mode command has been received, the MPU 92 executes special mode notification processing in step S2118C based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 after the opening / closing execution mode ends, as shown in FIG. Notifying the player that the player is going to the special mode in “30 chance zones!” And notifying that the special mode will continue until thirty game times are consumed.

Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. In the low frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 30 game times are consumed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value on the symbol display device 51 with the value of the game number counter RTC as the remaining number of times until the reference end number of the special mode (30 times in FIG. 50E) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest left-handedness to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times until the special mode end reference number is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

<Regarding the game ball entering the right variable ball entry mechanism and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an effect for a game turn when a game ball wins at the lower operation port triggered by winning at the through gate in the high-frequency support mode.
Note that the high frequency support mode is either “big win” or “small win” in the winning lottery, and is assigned to the “high frequency support mode result” in the distribution lottery, or during the special mode stay. When the lottery is “big win” and the distribution lottery is assigned to “low frequency support mode result”, the process proceeds. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 when the result of the success / failure is “small winning”.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4B) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. To shift to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the symbol fluctuation display by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment, upward). Further, the MPU 102 displays the value of the game number counter RTC on the symbol display device 51 as the remaining number of times up to the high frequency support mode end reference number (95 in FIG. 51A) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the screen G.
After the elapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 stops displaying a part of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) on the effective line L (see FIG. 4B) as shown in FIG. By displaying the same symbol combination (for example, “A”) and indicating the stop result, the remaining symbol string (symbol symbol Z2) is displayed in a variable manner in that state, thereby generating a reach display. Transition to reach period.

  Thereafter, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same alphabetic characters (for example, “AAA”) on the active line L as a stop result, thereby determining the result of the lottery result. (See FIG. 28B).

After causing the MPU 102 to stop and display the combination of symbols having the same alphabetical characters on the effective line L, the MPU 62 sets the blade member 401a to an open state by executing drive control of the blade member drive unit 401c ( (See FIG. 28C).
Further, the MPU 102 generates an effect for notifying the player of the opening of the blade member based on the blade member opening command received from the MPU 92. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays a character on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 and informs the player to make a right strike at the character's dialogue.

The MPU 102 executes the effect for the variable pitch execution mode based on the command for the variable pitch execution mode received from the MPU 92.
In the effect for the variable pitch execution mode, the MPU 102, based on the V winning success command received from the MPU 92 when the game ball wins (V winning) in the right pitch entrance 404 in the variable pitch execution mode, An effect corresponding to the success of the V prize is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the character “V” on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 and notifies the player that the game ball has won (V win) at the right entrance 404. (See FIG. 28D).
Also, in the production for the variable pitch execution mode, the MPU 102 receives the V winning failure command received from the MPU 92 when the game ball has not won a prize (V winning) at the right entrance 404. An effect corresponding to the failure is executed. Specifically, the MPU 102 displays the word “sorry” on the entire surface of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 and informs the player that the game ball has not won (V prize) at the right entrance 404. Notification is made (see FIG. 28E).

  The MPU 102 executes an effect corresponding to the success of the V winning when the game ball wins (V winning) at the right entrance 404 in the variable winning execution mode. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening / closing execution mode.

  In the determination process of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, the effect A3 as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S2202C. Select. In this effect A3, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and the line “RUSH rush! “If you win within, you ’ll get a bonus” and inform the player that the game result is “high frequency support mode result” (that is, shift to normal mode) and win within 10 revolutions. Then, the special mode is informed that it will continue until 50 game times are consumed.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. In the high frequency support mode, the game mode shifts to the normal mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays the symbol as the remaining number of times up to the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode (100 times in FIG. 51C) based on the contents of the change command. It is displayed on the upper left of the display screen G of the device 51. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest a right strike to the player.

  On the other hand, in the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the game result is not the “high frequency support mode result” in step S2201, and determines that the game mode is not the special mode in step S2203. If it is determined (when it is determined that the game mode is the normal mode), the effect B3 is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S2204C.

  If the MPU 62 determines that the value of the game number counter RTC is “90” or more in step S1402 (see FIG. 51A), the MPU 62 is provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1404. “50” is set to the value of the game number counter RTC, and a special mode command is set in step S1110C. If the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that a special mode command has been received, the MPU 92 executes special mode notification processing in step S2118C based on the content of the special mode command. In this special mode notification process, the MPU 92 sets a special mode notification command. This special mode notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

  Based on the special mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 after completion of the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. In addition to notifying the player of the transition to the special mode at “50 Chance Zone!”, The special mode is informed that the game will continue until 50 game times are consumed.

Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the low-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. In the low-frequency support mode, the game mode stays in the special mode until 50 game times are consumed, and then shifts to the normal mode. In the special mode, the MPU 102 displays the value on the symbol display device 51 with the value of the game number counter RTC as the remaining number of times until the reference end number of the special mode (50 times in FIG. 51E) based on the contents of the change command. Display on the upper left of screen G. Further, in the low-frequency support mode of the special mode, the MPU 102 displays a left-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in order to suggest left-handedness to the player.
In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times until the special mode end reference number is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, but this may not be displayed.

According to this embodiment, the following operations and effects can be obtained in addition to the same operations and effects as (1) to (5) and (7) to (11) in the first embodiment. Can play.
(14) The main control device 60 shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is digested 30 times or 50 times after shifting the game mode to the special mode. Pay attention to the number of digestion times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(15) The main control device 60 is set to the number of times that the game times are consumed and the number of times less than the end reference number after the game state is shifted to the high frequency support mode and before the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. Based on the result of the comparison with the threshold value, the player is divided into 50 special modes that are advantageous to the player and 30 special modes that are disadvantageous to the player rather than the 50 special modes. After shifting the game state to the support mode, attention is paid to the number of times the game has been consumed until the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve a player's attention to the game.

(16) The main control device 60 is set to a number of times less than the number of times of completion of the game times and the end reference number of times until the game state is changed to the opening / closing execution mode after the game state is changed to the high frequency support mode. Compared with the threshold value, if it is smaller than this threshold value, it is assigned to 50 special modes, so the player has set the number of times smaller than the end reference number after shifting to the high frequency support mode Pay attention to the game times up to the threshold. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(17) The special mode of 30 times is disadvantageous for the player compared with the special mode of 50 times because the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the game times less than 50 times are consumed. The game situation can be changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Modification of each embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the scope that can achieve the object of the present invention are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 executes one open / close of the big prize opening 38a for one round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the opening / closing of the large prize winning opening 38a a plurality of times per round game.
(2) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, or a game to the big prize opening 38a. When the total number of winning balls reaches the predetermined upper limit, the open / close door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the open / close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to an open state, and then the total number of game balls to be awarded to the big winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is a predetermined upper limit number. As a result, the open / close door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to an arbitrary number other than eight. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number differently according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number different for each round in one opening / closing execution mode.

(4) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes after the opening / closing door 38b is set in an open state, and the total number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end opportunity to set the open / close door 38b in a closed state when a game ball enters, and this end is performed when a predetermined time elapses. You may be comprised so that the entrance to an opportunity may be enabled.
(5) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 closes the open / close door 38b again after a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state. It was set to. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b after a predetermined time has elapsed since the winning of the special winning opening 38a occurs after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state. The closed state may be set again.

(6) In the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state again after setting the open / close door 38b to the open state. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the open / close door 38b again after the open / close door 38b is set to the open state.
(7) In each said embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 had one type of opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening / closing execution mode in which a round game is executed 15 times with an upper limit duration. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening / closing execution mode different from these with respect to the mode of the upper limit duration and the number of executions of the round game. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to set a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes by changing the mode of the upper limit duration, and instead of this, the degree of opening of the opening / closing door 38b such as half-opening or full-opening It is good also as a structure which sets multiple types of opening / closing execution modes by making these differ. Furthermore, the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact upper limit duration is different although it appears to the player in the same mode.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or selected by lottery from a plurality of types of effects. The selection rate may be set different depending on the game result.
(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the random number counter C1 for the lottery for generating the jackpot, and uses the category counter C2 for the lottery for lottery when the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, when the jackpot is generated, the MPU 62 may use the random number counter C1 for the jackpot type lottery. In this case, the hit type counter C <b> 2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64.

(10) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 has created a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by setting the support mode, but sets a gaming state other than these. Accordingly, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by making the number of game times to continue the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by differentiating the number of game times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. .

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the hold information related to the upper operation port 36 in the first result display unit reservation area Ra, and the hold information related to the lower operation port 37 to the second result display unit. By storing in the reserved area Rb, the hold information related to the upper working port 36 and the hold information related to the lower working port 37 are stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information related to the upper working port 36 and the hold information related to the lower working port 37 together.
(12) In each of the embodiments described above, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the hold information related to the lower operation port 37 for digestion of game times regardless of whether there is hold information related to the upper operation port 36 or not. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the hold information related to the upper operation port 36 and the hold information related to the lower operation port 37 for digestion of game times in the order of winning of the respective hold information.

(13) In each of the embodiments described above, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command obtained as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. Thus, control of the display control apparatus 100 is executed. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the sound emission control device 90. Control of the device 90 may be performed. The command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, but are arbitrary. .
(14) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. In contrast, for example, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is mainly used. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on winning in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, the effect for game times is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effects for game times are not limited to the effects described in the above embodiments, but are arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for game times by operating a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 51. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for game times by operating the light emitting means provided in the game board 31 and the symbol display device 51 in combination. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for game play by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 51.

(16) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (winning lottery and distribution lottery) based on winning in the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, and then the main display unit 45. The symbol display device 51 executes the variable display and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and the internal lottery performed after starting the variable display as a result of stopping the variable display. The result may be displayed. In this case, after starting the variable display and before stopping the variable display, the internal lottery may be executed and the setting of the stop result or the like may be executed.

(17) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 displays the variation display of the pattern and displays the result of the internal lottery as the stop result of the variation display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the change display stop result regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may not be identified. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may not include the main display unit 45.

(18) In each of the embodiments described above, the symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on winning in the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, the effect for game times is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 51 may execute an effect for game times on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that clearly shows the result of the internal lottery.

  For example, the symbol display device 51 assigns a predetermined area to at least one of the area narrower than the area for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the peripheral area of the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When setting and stopping the variable display of the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a symbol that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols displayed in the predetermined area may be displayed in a variable manner or may not be displayed during the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Here, as the symbols displayed in the predetermined area, characters, colors or patterns that are difficult for the player to identify may be adopted, or a combination thereof may be adopted. Moreover, even if it is not a character, a color, or a pattern that is difficult for a player to identify, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to identify by adopting a similar pattern or a combination thereof. According to this, the manager of the game hall, for example, is the same as the case where the lottery in which the jackpot is generated is won by observing the symbol display device 51 without observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. It is possible to easily check whether or not an illegal act is attempted to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above behavior.

(19) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate alone, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a gaming machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine, and information on the optical code is provided on a mobile phone or the like. The gaming machine may be configured such that information on the gaming machine can be transmitted to the web server by imaging and reading at and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured to receive the information of the web server by inputting the password issued by the player accessing the website into the gaming machine by operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine. May be.

(20) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been exemplified and described as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10, for example, the gaming machine of the present invention, when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens the electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be other types of gaming machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball.

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments will be described below. Of the features of the present invention group, the configuration corresponding to each embodiment is shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above embodiments, and Modifications, improvements, etc. within a range where the object can be achieved, and combinations of features are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and gaming state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
The gaming state is
A first gaming state (a low frequency support mode) having a gaming mode of a normal mode and a special mode;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state;
In the normal mode of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the gaming state transition means is configured to select one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. A gaming machine, wherein in the special mode of the first gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

  According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the game state transition means in the first game state in the normal mode and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, the first game state and the second game state. The game state is transferred to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is transferred to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery. Even if the game state is shifted to, the game is played in the expectation of staying in the special mode. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means switches from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. When the game state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is changed to one of the first game state and the second game state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means changes the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state when the gaming state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when transitioning to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A2 of the present invention group,
The starting pitching means is
A first starting entrance part (upper working port 36);
A second starting entrance part (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting entrance part,
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting entrance part than the second starting entrance part, and the second gaming state is more than the first starting entrance part. A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is achieved by increasing the probability of entering the second starting ball entering part.

  According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting entrance portion than the second starting entrance portion, and the second gaming state is the first start state. Since the probability of entering the second starting entrance part is higher than the entering part, in the first gaming state, the player launches the game ball aiming at the first starting entrance part, In the gaming state, the game ball is launched aiming at the second starting ball entering part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A3 of the present invention group,
The gaming area is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part and hardly generates a game ball to enter the first start entrance part; Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, a variable ball entry mechanism (right variable input) that allows the game ball launched toward the second route to enter the ball. A ball mechanism 40),
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entering mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering part, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is that the game ball enters the first start ball entering part. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher probability of shifting to the specific control state based on a result of an internal lottery executed at the time.

  According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering portion is the first starting ball entering portion. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the game, it is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second gaming state It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in any of features A1 to A4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means can change the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in any of features A1 to A4 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means (transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. To play.

  According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means transitions the gaming mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of gaming times have been consumed after transitioning the gaming mode to the special mode.

  According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then a predetermined number of game times are consumed. The person will pay attention to the number of times the game is consumed. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (variation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode has been shifted to the special mode by the gaming state transition means;
The gaming state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

  According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

  According to the feature group A of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the game board, and a start ball entering means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery upon entering the game ball A gaming machine equipped with is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery when the game ball enters the starting pitching means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Accordingly, the player plays a game in the hope of shifting to the high frequency support mode.

  However, when the gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the player must play the game in the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and as a result, the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and gaming state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
The gaming state is
The first gaming state (low frequency support mode);
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state;
The result of the internal lottery is
A first lottery result (low frequency support mode result) for transitioning the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state;
A gaming machine comprising a second lottery result (high frequency support mode result) for shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state.

  According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the result of the internal lottery is the first lottery result for shifting the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and the game to the second gaming state. And the second lottery result for shifting the state, the gaming machine can shift the gaming state to the second gaming state even when the gaming result is the first lottery result. It is possible to increase the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
The first gaming state is:
A normal mode for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state when the first lottery result is obtained;
A gaming machine having a special mode for shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state when the first lottery result is obtained.

  According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the first gaming state is the normal mode for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state when the first lottery result is obtained, and the first lottery result. A special mode for transitioning the gaming state to the second gaming state, the player expects to stay in the special mode even when the gaming state is transitioned to the first gaming state To play games. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B2 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means switches from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. When the game state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is changed to one of the first game state and the second game state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means changes the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state when the gaming state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when transitioning to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 of the present invention group,
The starting pitching means is
A first starting entrance part (upper working port 36);
A second starting entrance part (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting entrance part,
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting entrance part than the second starting entrance part, and the second gaming state is more than the first starting entrance part. A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is achieved by increasing the probability of entering the second starting ball entering part.

  According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting entrance portion than the second starting entrance portion, and the second gaming state is the first start state. Since the probability of entering the second starting entrance part is higher than the entering part, in the first gaming state, the player launches the game ball aiming at the first starting entrance part, In the gaming state, the game ball is launched aiming at the second starting ball entering part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B4 of the present invention group,
The gaming area is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part and hardly generates a game ball to enter the first start entrance part; Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, a variable ball entry mechanism (right variable input) that allows the game ball launched toward the second route to enter the ball. A ball mechanism 40),
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entering mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering part, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is that the game ball enters the first start ball entering part. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher probability of shifting to the specific control state based on a result of an internal lottery executed at the time.

  According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second start ball entering portion is the first start ball entering portion. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the game, it is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second gaming state It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B5 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means can change the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B5 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means (transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. To play.

  According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B7 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means transitions the gaming mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of gaming times have been consumed after transitioning the gaming mode to the special mode.

  According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then the predetermined number of game times are consumed. The person will pay attention to the number of times the game is consumed. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B2 to B7 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (variation ending process) for executing a normal mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game state to the normal mode after the game mode is shifted to the special mode by the gaming state shift means;
The gaming state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

  According to the feature B9 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

  According to such a feature group B of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the game board, and a start ball entering means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery upon entering the game ball A gaming machine equipped with is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery when the game ball enters the starting pitching means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Accordingly, the player plays a game in the hope of shifting to the high frequency support mode.

  However, since the transition destination of the first game state and the second game state is associated with the result of the internal lottery, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and gaming state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
The gaming state is
The first gaming state (low frequency support mode);
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state;
The first gaming state is:
Normal mode,
A special mode with a higher probability than the normal mode that the player is likely to enter a gaming state advantageous to the player,
The gaming state transition means transitions the gaming mode to the special mode when the gaming state transitions to the first gaming state, and the normal mode when the gaming state transitions to the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by transitioning to a gaming mode.

  According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the first gaming state includes a normal mode and a special mode having a higher probability of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player than the normal mode, and the gaming state transition means includes: When the game state is changed to the first game state, the game mode is changed to the special mode, and when the game state is changed to the second game state, the game mode is changed to the normal mode. Even when the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, the player is expected to stay in the special mode. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means switches from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. When the game state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is changed to one of the first game state and the second game state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means changes the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state when the gaming state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when transitioning to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C2 of the present invention group,
The starting pitching means is
A first starting entrance part (upper working port 36);
A second starting entrance part (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting entrance part,
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting entrance part than the second starting entrance part, and the second gaming state is more than the first starting entrance part. A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is achieved by increasing the probability of entering the second starting ball entering part.

  According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting entrance portion than the second starting entrance portion, and the second gaming state is the first start state. Since the probability of entering the second starting entrance part is higher than the entering part, in the first gaming state, the player launches the game ball aiming at the first starting entrance part, In the gaming state, the game ball is launched aiming at the second starting ball entering part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C3 of the present invention group,
The gaming area is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part and hardly generates a game ball to enter the first start entrance part; Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, a variable ball entry mechanism (right variable input) that allows the game ball launched toward the second route to enter the ball. A ball mechanism 40),
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entering mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering part, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is that the game ball enters the first start ball entering part. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher probability of shifting to the specific control state based on a result of an internal lottery executed at the time.

  According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second starting ball entering portion is the first starting ball entering portion. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the game, it is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second gaming state It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features C1 to C4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means can change the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features C1 to C4 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means (transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. To play.

  According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means transitions the gaming mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of gaming times have been consumed after transitioning the gaming mode to the special mode.

  According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then a predetermined number of game times are consumed. The person will pay attention to the number of times the game has been digested. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in any of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (variation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode has been shifted to the special mode by the gaming state transition means;
The gaming state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

  According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

  According to the feature group C of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the game board, and a start ball entering means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery upon entering the game ball A gaming machine equipped with is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery when the game ball enters the starting pitching means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Accordingly, the player plays a game in the hope of shifting to the high frequency support mode.

  However, when the gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the player must play the game in the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and as a result, the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and gaming state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
The gaming state is
The first gaming state (low frequency support mode);
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state;
The first gaming state is:
Normal mode,
A special mode with a higher probability than the normal mode that the player is likely to enter a gaming state advantageous to the player,
The gaming state transition means comprises normal mode lottery means (variation end processing) for executing a normal mode lottery as to whether or not to shift the gaming mode to the normal mode after shifting the gaming mode to the special mode,
The gaming state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

  According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the first gaming state includes a normal mode and a special mode in which the probability of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player is higher than the normal mode. Even when the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, the player is expected to stay in the special mode. Then, since the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means switches from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. When the game state is changed from the specific control state to the normal control state, the game state is changed to one of the first game state and the second game state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means changes the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state when the gaming state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when transitioning to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D2 of the present invention group,
The starting pitching means is
A first starting entrance part (upper working port 36);
A second starting entrance part (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting entrance part,
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting entrance part than the second starting entrance part, and the second gaming state is more than the first starting entrance part. A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is achieved by increasing the probability of entering the second starting ball entering part.

  According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting entrance portion than the second starting entrance portion, and the second gaming state is the first start state. Since the probability of entering the second starting entrance part is higher than the entering part, in the first gaming state, the player launches the game ball aiming at the first starting entrance part, In the gaming state, the game ball is launched aiming at the second starting ball entering part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D3 of the present invention group,
The gaming area is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part and hardly generates a game ball to enter the first start entrance part; Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, a variable ball entry mechanism (right variable input) that allows the game ball launched toward the second route to enter the ball. A ball mechanism 40),
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entering mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering part, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is that the game ball enters the first start ball entering part. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher probability of shifting to the specific control state based on a result of an internal lottery executed at the time.

  According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second start ball entering portion is the first start ball entering portion. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the game, it is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second gaming state It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any of features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means can change the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any of features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means (transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. To play.

  According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

  According to such a feature group D of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the game board, and a start ball entering means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery upon entering the game ball A gaming machine equipped with is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery when the game ball enters the starting pitching means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Accordingly, the player plays a game in the hope of shifting to the high frequency support mode.

  However, when the gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the player must play the game in the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and as a result, the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and gaming state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
The gaming state is
The first gaming state (low frequency support mode);
A second game state (high frequency support mode) that continues until the game times of the end reference number are consumed, and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The game state transition means switches from the normal control state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. After the state is changed and the game state is transferred to the second game state, the number of game times consumed until the game state is changed to the specific control state and the number of times smaller than the end reference number are set. Based on the result of the comparison with the threshold value, the advantageous game situation (50 special modes) advantageous to the player and the disadvantageous game situation (30 special modes) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous game situation ) And gaming machines characterized by being distributed to.

  According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means includes the number of game times consumed after the transition of the gaming state to the second gaming state and the transition of the gaming state to the specific control state, and the end reference number of times. Based on the result of comparing the threshold value set to a smaller number of times, the game is divided into an advantageous game situation advantageous to the player and an adverse game situation more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous game situation. The person pays attention to the number of times the game has been consumed until the game state is changed to the specific control state after the game state is changed to the second game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means sets the number of game times to be consumed and the number of times smaller than the end reference number after the transition of the gaming state to the second gaming state until the transition of the gaming state to the specific control state. The gaming machine is characterized in that when compared with the threshold value, it is assigned to the advantageous game situation when it is smaller than the threshold value, and is assigned to the disadvantaged game situation when it is larger.

  According to the feature E2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means includes the number of game times consumed until the game state transitions to the specific control state after the transition of the game state to the second game state, and the end reference number Is compared with the threshold value set to a smaller number of times, and if it is smaller than this threshold value, it is assigned to the advantageous game state, so that the player transfers the game state to the second game state, and then ends the reference number of times. Attention is paid to game times up to a threshold set to a smaller number of times. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E2 of the present invention group,
The first gaming state is:
Normal mode,
A special mode with a higher probability than the normal mode that the player is likely to enter a gaming state advantageous to the player,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming state transition means shifts the gaming mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when the gaming state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state.

  According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, the first gaming state includes a normal mode and a special mode having a higher probability of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player than the normal mode. Even when the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, the player is expected to stay in the special mode. The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode when the game state transitions from the specific control state to the normal control state. We will pay attention to no. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E3 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of gaming times have been consumed after shifting the gaming mode to the special mode,
The special mode is
The advantageous game situation of transitioning the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of game times have been consumed;
A gaming machine comprising the disadvantageous gaming situation in which the gaming mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the gaming times less than a predetermined number are consumed.

  According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then the predetermined number of game times are consumed. The person will pay attention to the number of times the game is consumed. Also, the disadvantageous game situation is that the game mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode when the number of game times less than the predetermined number is consumed, so the game situation is disadvantageous for the player compared to the advantageous game situation. It can be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E3 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (variation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode has been shifted to the special mode by the gaming state transition means;
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won,
The special mode is
The advantageous game situation with a low probability of winning the normal mode lottery;
The gaming machine having the disadvantageous gaming situation having a high probability of winning the normal mode lottery.

  According to the feature E5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when winning the normal mode lottery, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Also, since the disadvantageous gaming situation has a high probability of winning the normal mode lottery, the gaming situation can be disadvantageous for the player as compared to the advantageous gaming situation. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E3 to E5 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature E6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means can change the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E3 to E5 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means (transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. To play.

  According to the feature E7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E7 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state to one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state when the gaming state transitions from the specific control state to the normal control state. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature E8 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means changes the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state when the gaming state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when transitioning to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E8 of the present invention group,
The starting pitching means is
A first starting entrance part (upper working port 36);
A second starting entrance part (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting entrance part,
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting entrance part than the second starting entrance part, and the second gaming state is more than the first starting entrance part. A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is achieved by increasing the probability of entering the second starting ball entering part.

  According to the feature E9 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting entrance portion than the second starting entrance portion, and the second gaming state is the first start state. Since the probability of entering the second starting entrance part is higher than the entering part, in the first gaming state, the player launches the game ball aiming at the first starting entrance part, In the gaming state, the game ball is launched aiming at the second starting ball entering part. Therefore, the gaming machine can clearly suggest the first gaming state and the second gaming state to the player.

Feature E10.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E9 of the present invention group,
The gaming area is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part and hardly generates a game ball to enter the first start entrance part; Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, a variable ball entry mechanism (right variable input) that allows the game ball launched toward the second route to enter the ball. A ball mechanism 40),
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entering mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering part, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is that the game ball enters the first start ball entering part. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher probability of shifting to the specific control state based on a result of an internal lottery executed at the time.

  According to the feature E10 of the present invention group, the probability of shifting to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the second start ball entering portion is the first start ball entering portion. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball into the game, it is higher than the probability of shifting to the specific control state, so the player expects to shift the game state to the second gaming state It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

  According to the feature group E of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the game board, and a start ball entering means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery upon entering the game ball A gaming machine equipped with is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery when the game ball enters the starting pitching means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Accordingly, the player plays a game in the hope of shifting to the high frequency support mode.

  However, the second gaming state continues until the end reference number of gaming times is consumed, and the gaming machine is based on the result of the internal lottery regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot lottery in the second gaming state. Since the gaming state is shifted, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and gaming state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, a variable ball entry mechanism (right variable ball entry mechanism 40) that allows the game ball to enter,
The gaming state is
A first short time state (high frequency support mode) that makes it easier to enter the variable entry mechanism;
A second short time state (special mode low frequency support mode) that makes it difficult to enter the variable pitching mechanism as compared to the first short time state,
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the variable pitching mechanism. .

  According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, the game state is less likely to enter the variable pitching mechanism as compared to the first short time state in which it is easy to enter the variable pitching mechanism and the first short time state. Since the second short-time state is provided, it is possible to diversify the types of game states that can shift the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism. it can. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 of the present invention group,
The starting pitching means is
A first starting entrance part (upper working port 36);
A second starting entrance part (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting entrance part,
The gaming area is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part and hardly causes a game ball to enter the first start entrance part,
The variable pitching mechanism allows a gaming ball launched toward the second path to enter based on a result of an internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting pitching means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the player launches a game ball toward the second path in the first short time state, and the game ball toward the first path in the second short time state. Will be fired. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the player's intention, and can make the player play the game comfortably.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 or the feature F2 of the present invention group,
The gaming state is
A first gaming state (a low frequency support mode) having a gaming mode of a normal mode and the second short-time state as a special mode;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state;
In the normal mode of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the gaming state transition means is configured to select one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. A gaming machine, wherein in the special mode of the first gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

  According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, the first game state and the second game state. The game state is transferred to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is transferred to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery. Even if the game state is shifted to, the game is played in the expectation of staying in the special mode. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means, and the specific control A gaming machine, wherein when a gaming state is shifted from a state to the normal control state, the gaming state is shifted to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

  According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means changes the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state when the gaming state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when transitioning to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature F5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means can change the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means (transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. To play.

  According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means transitions the gaming mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of gaming times have been consumed after transitioning the gaming mode to the special mode.

  According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then a predetermined number of game times are consumed. The person will pay attention to the number of times the game is consumed. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (variation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode has been shifted to the special mode by the gaming state transition means;
The gaming state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

  According to the feature F8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

  According to the feature group F of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the game board, and a start ball entering means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery upon entering the game ball A gaming machine equipped with is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery when the game ball enters the starting pitching means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Accordingly, the player plays a game in the hope of shifting to the high frequency support mode.

In addition, as a kind of such a gaming machine, a game having a variable ball entry mechanism that allows a game ball to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. The machine is known.
This gaming machine shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. And a game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
The high-frequency support mode is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state by making it easier to enter the variable pitching mechanism.

  However, when the gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the player must play the game in the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and as a result, the game may be stopped immediately.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is executed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with starting ball entering means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) and gaming state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. ) And
The starting pitching means is
A first starting entrance part (upper working port 36);
A second starting entrance part (lower operating port 37) different from the first starting entrance part,
The gaming area is
A first path (left-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start-up entrance part, and less likely to cause a game ball to enter the second start-up entrance part;
A second path (right-handed route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start entrance part and hardly causes a game ball to enter the first start entrance part,
The gaming state is
By launching a game ball toward the second path, a first time-short state (high frequency support mode) that is advantageous to the player,
By launching a game ball toward the second route, a second short time state (special mode low frequency support mode) that is disadvantageous for the player compared to the first short time state Prepared,
The gaming machine is
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, a variable ball entry mechanism (right variable) that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter. A ball entry mechanism 40),
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the variable pitching mechanism. .

  According to the feature G1 of the present invention group, the gaming state is directed to the first short-time state, which is advantageous for the player by launching the game ball toward the second route, and to the second route. When the game ball enters the variable pitching mechanism, it has a second short time state that is disadvantageous for the player as compared to the first short time state. It is possible to diversify the types of gaming states in which the gaming state can be shifted from the normal control state to the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming state transition means terminates the second shortening state when a game ball is launched toward the second route while staying in the second shortening state. .

  According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, the game state transition means ends the second time-short state when a game ball is launched toward the second route during the stay in the second time-short state. In the first short time state, the player launches a game ball toward the second route, and in the second short time state, the player launches a game ball toward the first route. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely reflect the player's intention, and can make the player play the game comfortably.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 or the feature G2 of the present invention group,
The gaming state is
A first gaming state (a low frequency support mode) having a gaming mode of a normal mode and the second short-time state as a special mode;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state;
In the normal mode of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the gaming state transition means is configured to select one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. A gaming machine, wherein in the special mode of the first gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state regardless of the result of the internal lottery.

  According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means, in the normal mode of the first game state and the second game state, based on the result of the internal lottery, the first game state and the second game state. The game state is transferred to one of the states, and in the special mode of the first game state, the game state is transferred to the second game state regardless of the result of the internal lottery. Even if the game state is shifted to, the game is played in the expectation of staying in the special mode. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means, and the specific control A gaming machine, wherein when a gaming state is shifted from a state to the normal control state, the gaming state is shifted to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

  According to the feature G4 of the present invention group, the gaming state transition means changes the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state when the gaming state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state. Since the transition is made, the player pays attention to whether or not he / she is staying in the special mode when transitioning to the first gaming state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature G5 of the present invention group, the game state transition means can change the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group,
Special mode lottery means (transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode) for executing a special mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the special mode,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. To play.

  According to the feature G6 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the special mode lottery is not won, and shifts the game mode to the special mode when the special mode lottery is won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the special mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group,
The gaming state transition means transitions the gaming mode from the special mode to the normal mode when a predetermined number of gaming times have been consumed after transitioning the gaming mode to the special mode.

  According to the feature G7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode from the special mode to the normal mode when the game mode is shifted to the special mode and then a predetermined number of game times are consumed. The person pays attention to the number of times the game has been digested. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature G8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group,
A normal mode lottery means (variation end process) for executing a normal mode lottery for determining whether or not to shift the game mode to the normal mode after the game mode has been shifted to the special mode by the gaming state transition means;
The gaming state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won.

  According to the feature G8 of the present invention group, the game state transition means shifts the game mode to the normal mode when the normal mode lottery is won, so the player pays attention to the result of the normal mode lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

  According to such a feature group G of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the game board, and a start ball entering means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery upon entering the game ball A gaming machine equipped with is known.
The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery when the game ball enters the starting pitching means, and shifts the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a low frequency support mode (first gaming state) and a high frequency support mode (second gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low frequency support mode. ing. Accordingly, the player plays a game in the hope of shifting to the high frequency support mode.

In addition, as a kind of such a gaming machine, a game having a variable ball entry mechanism that allows a game ball to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. The machine is known.
This gaming machine shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. And a game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the game ball enters the variable ball entry mechanism.
The high-frequency support mode is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state by making it easier to enter the variable pitching mechanism.

  However, when the gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the player must play the game in the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state. However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered, and as a result, the game may be stopped immediately.

  As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 35 ... General winning opening, 36 ... Upper operating opening, 37 ... Lower operating opening, 38 ... Variable winning apparatus, 38a ... Large winning opening, 38b ... Opening / closing door, 38c ... Variable winning driving section, 39 ... Out Mouth, 40... Right side variable pitching mechanism, 51... Symbol display device, 60... Main control device, 62... MPU, 90.

Claims (6)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board; a start ball entering means for causing the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and executing an internal lottery upon entering the game ball; A gaming machine comprising gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the internal lottery,
The gaming state is
A first gaming state;
A second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The result of the internal lottery is
A first lottery result for transitioning the gaming state to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state;
A gaming machine comprising: a second lottery result for shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The first gaming state is:
A normal mode for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state when the first lottery result is obtained;
A gaming machine having a special mode for shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state when the first lottery result is obtained. In the gaming machine according to claim 2,
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means, A gaming machine, wherein when the gaming state is shifted from the specific control state to the normal control state, the gaming state is shifted to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. In the gaming machine according to claim 3,
The starting pitching means is
A first starting pitching section;
A second starting entrance part different from the first starting entrance part,
The first gaming state has a higher probability of entering the first starting entrance part than the second starting entrance part, and the second gaming state is more than the first starting entrance part. A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is achieved by increasing the probability of entering the second starting ball entering part. In the gaming machine according to claim 4,
The gaming area is
A first path that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the first start entrance part, and prevents a game ball from entering the second start entrance part; and
A second path that makes it easy to generate a game ball to enter the second start ball entering portion and does not easily cause a game ball to enter the first start ball entering portion. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed at the time of entering the game ball, a variable ball entry mechanism that allows the game ball launched toward the second path to enter,
The gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to the specific control state when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entering mechanism,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entering part, the probability of shifting to the specific control state is that the game ball enters the first start ball entering part. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher probability of shifting to the specific control state based on a result of an internal lottery executed at the time. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 5,
The game state transition means shifts the game mode to either the normal mode or the special mode based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entering means. A gaming machine.

Images